Contents
Introduction to Your Projector
Setting Up the Projector
Using the Projector on a Network
Using Basic Projector Features
Adjusting Projector Features
Using the Interactive Features
Adjusting the Menu Settings
Maintaining and Transporting the Projector
Solving Problems
Technical Specifications
Notices

Epson 1480Fi User Manual

Displayed below is the user manual for 1480Fi by Epson which is a product in the Data Projectors category. This manual has pages.

Related Manuals

Epson EB-1480Fi Manual

Epson Epson M-190: 57.5mm, 5V, Standard Ribbon Manual

Epson Epson SureColor SCF7000 Manual

Epson TM-U220A Manual

Epson TM-U295 Manual

Epson TM-U220PA Manual

Epson TM-U220PA-103 Manual

Epson TM-U295P Parallel White Manual

BrightLink 1480Fi/1485Fi User's Guide

Contents

BrightLink 1480Fi/1485Fi User's Guide ................................................................................................... 13

Introduction to Your Projector ................................................................................................................. 14

Projector Features.............................................................................................................................. 14

Product Box Contents.................................................................................................................... 16

Additional Components ................................................................................................................ 17

Optional Equipment and Replacement Parts................................................................................. 18

Warranty and Registration Information .......................................................................................... 19

Notations Used in the Documentation ................................................................................................ 20

Where to Go for Additional Information .............................................................................................. 20

Additional Projector Software and Manuals........................................................................................ 20

Projector Part Locations ..................................................................................................................... 22

Projector Parts - Front/Side ........................................................................................................... 23

Projector Parts - Top/Side ............................................................................................................. 24

Projector Parts - Interface.............................................................................................................. 25

Projector Parts - Base.................................................................................................................... 26

Projector Parts - Control Panel ...................................................................................................... 27

Projector Parts - Remote Control................................................................................................... 28

Projector Parts - Interactive Pens .................................................................................................. 30

Projector Parts - Pen Stand (BrightLink 1485Fi)............................................................................ 31

Projector Parts - Control Pad (BrightLink 1485Fi).......................................................................... 32

Projector Parts - Touch Unit .......................................................................................................... 33

Setting Up the Projector ........................................................................................................................... 35

Projector Placement........................................................................................................................... 35

Projector Setup and Installation Options ....................................................................................... 36

Projection Distance........................................................................................................................ 38

Removing and Attaching the Cable Cover.......................................................................................... 39

Projector Connections........................................................................................................................ 39

Connecting to Computer Sources.................................................................................................. 40

Connecting to a Computer for USB Video and Audio................................................................ 40

Connecting to a Computer for VGA Video................................................................................. 42

Connecting to a Computer for HDMI Video and Audio.............................................................. 42

Connecting to a Computer for Pen and Finger Use................................................................... 43

Connecting a Computer to the Control Pad............................................................................... 44

Connecting to a Computer for Sound........................................................................................ 45

Connecting to Video Sources ........................................................................................................ 46

Connecting to an HDMI Video Source ...................................................................................... 46

Connecting to a Composite Video Source ................................................................................ 47

Connecting to a Video Source for Sound .................................................................................. 48

Connecting External Output Devices............................................................................................. 48

Connecting to an External Computer Monitor ........................................................................... 49

Connecting to an External HDMI Monitor.................................................................................. 50

Connecting to External Speakers.............................................................................................. 50

Connecting a Microphone.............................................................................................................. 51

Connecting to External USB Devices ............................................................................................ 52

USB Device Projection.............................................................................................................. 52

Connecting a USB Device or Camera to the Projector.............................................................. 53

Connecting a USB Device to the Control Pad ........................................................................... 53

Selecting the Connected USB Source ...................................................................................... 54

Disconnecting a USB Device From the Control Pad or Projector.............................................. 55

Connecting to a Document Camera .............................................................................................. 55

Connecting a Printer to the Control Pad ........................................................................................ 56

Connecting Multiple Projectors of the Same Model ....................................................................... 56

Multiple Projector Connection Menu Settings ........................................................................... 58

Installing Batteries in the Remote Control .......................................................................................... 61

Installing Batteries in the Pens ........................................................................................................... 62

Using the Projector on a Network ............................................................................................................ 64

Wired Network Projection................................................................................................................... 64

Connecting to a Wired Network ..................................................................................................... 65

Selecting Wired Network Settings ................................................................................................. 65

Wireless Network Projection .............................................................................................................. 68

Installing the Wireless LAN Module ............................................................................................... 69

Connecting Directly to a Smartphone or Tablet ............................................................................. 71

Using Quick Wireless Connection (Windows)................................................................................ 74

Selecting Wireless Network Settings Manually.............................................................................. 75

Wireless LAN Menu Settings .................................................................................................... 80

Selecting Wireless Network Settings in Windows.......................................................................... 83

Selecting Wireless Network Settings on Mac ................................................................................ 83

Setting Up Wireless Network Security ........................................................................................... 83

Wireless Network Projection from a Mobile Device or Windows Computer (Screen Mirroring) .......... 85

Screen Mirroring Restrictions ........................................................................................................ 85

Selecting Screen Mirroring Settings .............................................................................................. 86

Connecting for Screen Mirroring with a Windows 8.x/Windows 10 Computer ............................... 88

Connecting for Screen Mirroring with Miracast .............................................................................. 89

Setting Up Projector Network E-Mail Alerts ........................................................................................ 90

Network Projector E-mail Alert Messages ..................................................................................... 91

Setting Up Monitoring Using SNMP ................................................................................................... 91

Controlling a Networked Projector Using a Web Browser .................................................................. 92

Creating an Address Book ................................................................................................................. 95

Using Crestron Connected................................................................................................................. 96

Setting Up Crestron Connected..................................................................................................... 97

Controlling a Networked Projector Using Crestron Connected...................................................... 98

Registering a Digital Certificate on the Projector .............................................................................. 100

Importing a Web Server Certificate Using the Projector Menus................................................... 100

Registering Digital Certificates from a Web Browser ................................................................... 101

Digital Certificate Types............................................................................................................... 102

Using Basic Projector Features ............................................................................................................. 104

Turning On the Projector .................................................................................................................. 104

Using the Home Screen............................................................................................................... 106

Turning Off the Projector .................................................................................................................. 108

Selecting the Language for the Projector Menus.............................................................................. 110

Setting the Date and Time................................................................................................................ 110

Image Shape.................................................................................................................................... 112

Correcting Image Shape with the Keystone Buttons.................................................................... 112

Correcting Image Shape with Quick Corner ................................................................................ 115

Correcting Image Shape with Arc Correction............................................................................... 118

Correcting Image Shape with Point Correction............................................................................ 121

Correcting Image Shape with Corner Markers............................................................................. 123

Applying Saved Image Shape Settings ....................................................................................... 125

Resizing the Image with the Wide and Tele Buttons ........................................................................ 125

Adjusting the Image Position............................................................................................................ 126

Focusing the Image.......................................................................................................................... 128

Remote Control Operation ............................................................................................................... 131

Selecting an Image Source .............................................................................................................. 132

Projection Modes ............................................................................................................................. 135

Changing the Projection Mode Using the Remote Control .......................................................... 135

Changing the Projection Mode Using the Menus......................................................................... 136

Image Aspect Ratio .......................................................................................................................... 137

Changing the Image Aspect Ratio ............................................................................................... 138

Available Image Aspect Ratios.................................................................................................... 138

Color Mode....................................................................................................................................... 139

Changing the Color Mode............................................................................................................ 139

Available Color Modes................................................................................................................. 140

Adjusting the Hue, Saturation, and Brightness................................................................................. 141

Adjusting Gamma............................................................................................................................. 142

Adjusting the Image Resolution........................................................................................................ 144

Adjusting the Projector's Brightness Level ....................................................................................... 146

Constant Brightness Usage Hours .............................................................................................. 148

Turning On Dynamic Contrast.......................................................................................................... 150

Controlling the Volume with the Volume Buttons.............................................................................. 151

Inverting the Audio Channels ........................................................................................................... 151

Selecting a Quick Startup Setting..................................................................................................... 152

Projecting a PC Free Presentation ................................................................................................... 154

Supported PC Free File Types .................................................................................................... 154

Starting a PC Free Slideshow...................................................................................................... 156

Starting a PC Free Movie Presentation ....................................................................................... 157

PC Free Display Options ............................................................................................................. 159

Adjusting Projector Features ................................................................................................................. 161

Shutting Off the Picture and Sound Temporarily .............................................................................. 161

Stopping Video Action Temporarily .................................................................................................. 162

Zooming Into and Out of Images ...................................................................................................... 163

Using Multiple Projectors (DuoLink) ................................................................................................. 164

Projector Identification System for Multiple Projector Control ...................................................... 164

Setting the Projector ID........................................................................................................... 164

Setting the Remote Control ID ................................................................................................ 165

Adjusting Color Uniformity ........................................................................................................... 166

Blending the Image Edges .......................................................................................................... 170

Matching the Image Colors ......................................................................................................... 172

Adjusting the Black Level ............................................................................................................ 174

Adjusting RGBCMY .................................................................................................................... 178

Scaling an Image......................................................................................................................... 180

Projecting Multiple Images Simultaneously...................................................................................... 182

Input Sources for Split Screen Projection .................................................................................... 184

Split Screen Projection Restrictions............................................................................................. 185

Projector Security Features.............................................................................................................. 185

Password Security Types ............................................................................................................ 186

Setting a Password ................................................................................................................. 186

Selecting Password Security Types........................................................................................ 187

Entering a Password to Use the Projector............................................................................... 188

Saving a User's Logo Image to Display................................................................................... 189

Locking the Projector's Buttons ................................................................................................... 191

Unlocking the Projector's Buttons ........................................................................................... 192

Installing a Security Cable ........................................................................................................... 193

Creating a User Pattern to Display ................................................................................................... 193

Saving Settings to Memory and Using Saved Settings .................................................................... 195

Copying Menu Settings Between Projectors .................................................................................... 196

Saving Settings to a USB Flash Drive.......................................................................................... 197

Transferring Settings from a USB Flash Drive ............................................................................. 198

Saving Settings to a Computer .................................................................................................... 199

Transferring Settings from a Computer ....................................................................................... 201

Scheduling Projector Events ............................................................................................................ 202

Saving a Scheduled Event........................................................................................................... 203

Viewing Scheduled Events .......................................................................................................... 205

Editing a Scheduled Event........................................................................................................... 206

Using the Interactive Features ............................................................................................................... 209

Interactive Modes............................................................................................................................. 209

Using the Projected Screen as a Whiteboard (Built-in Whiteboard Mode)................................... 210

Drawing on a Projected Image (Built-in Annotation Mode) .......................................................... 211

Controlling Computer Features from a Projected Screen (PC Interactive Mode)......................... 212

PC Interactive Mode System Requirements ........................................................................... 214

Using the Interactive Pens ............................................................................................................... 214

Using the Pens ............................................................................................................................ 215

Pen Calibration............................................................................................................................ 217

Calibrating Automatically ........................................................................................................ 218

Calibrating Manually ............................................................................................................... 220

Using Finger Touch Interactivity ...................................................................................................... 223

Touch Unit Safety Instructions..................................................................................................... 223

Performing Touch Unit Angle Adjustment.................................................................................... 224

Calibrating for Finger Touch Interactivity ..................................................................................... 229

Using Finger Touch Operations................................................................................................... 232

Using BrightLink with a Computer .................................................................................................... 235

Adjusting the Pen Operation Area ............................................................................................... 236

Easy Interactive Tools ................................................................................................................. 238

Windows Pen Input and Ink Tools .................................................................................................... 238

Enabling Windows Pen Input and Ink Tools................................................................................. 239

Using Windows Pen Input and Ink Tools ..................................................................................... 240

Whiteboard Mode............................................................................................................................. 242

Using the Whiteboard Toolbar ..................................................................................................... 242

The Whiteboard Toolbar.............................................................................................................. 243

Selecting Background Templates................................................................................................ 246

Inserting and Working With Images............................................................................................. 246

Selecting Whiteboard Settings .................................................................................................... 247

Selecting Basic Whiteboard Settings ...................................................................................... 248

Selecting Whiteboard Print Settings........................................................................................ 249

Selecting Settings for Saving Whiteboard Pages.................................................................... 251

Selecting Settings for Emailing Whiteboard Pages ................................................................. 253

Selecting Settings for a Directory Server ................................................................................ 254

Selecting a Networked Device Source ........................................................................................ 257

Saving Pages in Whiteboard Mode ............................................................................................. 257

Printing Whiteboard Pages.......................................................................................................... 259

Emailing Whiteboard Pages ........................................................................................................ 260

Using BrightLink Without a Computer .............................................................................................. 262

Using the Built-in Annotation Mode ............................................................................................. 262

Built-in Tools for Use Without a Computer................................................................................... 263

Controlling an Epson Document Camera .................................................................................... 266

Splitting the Projected Image with Whiteboard Mode ....................................................................... 267

Sharing the Projected Screen .......................................................................................................... 268

Starting a Shared Screen Session............................................................................................... 268

Using Interactive Features with Two Projectors (DuoLink)............................................................... 269

Adjusting the Menu Settings .................................................................................................................. 270

Using the Projector's Menus............................................................................................................. 270

Image Quality Settings - Image Menu .............................................................................................. 272

Input Signal Settings - Signal I/O Menu............................................................................................ 277

Installation Settings - Installation Menu ............................................................................................ 281

Display Settings - Display Menu....................................................................................................... 286

Feature Settings - Operation Menu .................................................................................................. 289

Administration Settings - Management Menu................................................................................... 293

Event ID Code List....................................................................................................................... 299

Network Settings - Network Menu .................................................................................................... 302

Pen and Touch Setup Settings - Pen/Touch Menu........................................................................... 305

Interactive Settings - Interactive Menu ............................................................................................. 308

Multiple Projector Operation Settings - Multi-Projection Menu ......................................................... 311

Image Quality Memory Settings - Memory Menu ............................................................................. 316

Setup Settings - ECO Menu ............................................................................................................. 317

Initial Settings and Reset Options - Initial/All Settings Menu ............................................................ 319

Maintaining and Transporting the Projector ......................................................................................... 321

Projector Maintenance ..................................................................................................................... 321

Cleaning the Lens........................................................................................................................ 321

Cleaning the Projector Case........................................................................................................ 322

Air Filter and Vent Maintenance ....................................................................................................... 322

Cleaning the Air Filter and Vents ................................................................................................. 323

Replacing the Air Filter ................................................................................................................ 327

Replacing the Remote Control Batteries .......................................................................................... 329

Replacing the Hard Pen Tips............................................................................................................ 331

Replacing the Soft Pen Tips ............................................................................................................. 332

Updating the Firmware ..................................................................................................................... 335

Transporting the Projector................................................................................................................ 335

Solving Problems .................................................................................................................................... 336

Projection Problem Tips ................................................................................................................... 336

Projector Light Status ....................................................................................................................... 337

Using the Projector Menu Displays .................................................................................................. 340

Solving Image or Sound Problems ................................................................................................... 341

Solutions When No Image Appears............................................................................................. 341

Solutions When Image is Incorrect Using the USB Display Function .......................................... 342

Solutions When "No Signal" Message Appears........................................................................... 343

Displaying From a PC Laptop ................................................................................................. 344

Displaying From a Mac Laptop ............................................................................................... 345

Solutions When "Not Supported" Message Appears ................................................................... 345

Solutions When Only a Partial Image Appears............................................................................ 345

Solutions When the Image is Not Rectangular ............................................................................ 346

Solutions When the Image Contains Noise or Static ................................................................... 347

Solutions When the Image is Fuzzy or Blurry .............................................................................. 348

Solutions When the Image Brightness or Colors are Incorrect .................................................... 349

Solutions When an Afterimage Remains On the Projected Image............................................... 349

Solutions to Sound Problems ...................................................................................................... 350

Solutions to Microphone Problems .............................................................................................. 351

Solving Projector or Remote Control Operation Problems ............................................................... 351

Solutions to Projector Power or Shut-Off Problems..................................................................... 351

Solutions to Remote Control Problems........................................................................................ 352

Solutions to Password Problems ................................................................................................. 353

Solutions When a Battery Message Appears .............................................................................. 354

Solving Network Problems ............................................................................................................... 354

Solutions When Wireless Authentication Fails ............................................................................ 354

Solutions When You Cannot Access the Projector Through the Web ......................................... 355

Solutions When Network Alert E-Mails are Not Received............................................................ 355

Solutions When the Image Contains Static During Network Projection ....................................... 356

Solutions When You Cannot Connect Using Screen Mirroring.................................................... 356

Solutions When the Image or Sound Contains Static When Using Screen Mirroring................... 356

Solutions When the Projected Screen is not Shared Correctly .................................................... 357

Solving Interactive Problems............................................................................................................ 357

Solutions When the Interactive Pens Do Not Work...................................................................... 358

Solutions When the Interactive Pen Position Is Not Accurate...................................................... 360

Solutions When the Interactive Pens Are Slow or Difficult to Use................................................ 361

Solutions When the Interactive Pens Cause Interference or Unwanted Effects .......................... 361

Solutions When Finger Touch Interactivity Does Not Work ......................................................... 361

Solutions When You Cannot Operate a Computer from the Projected Screen............................ 363

Solutions for Problems With Capturing, Printing, Saving, or Scanning ........................................ 363

Solutions for Problems with Whiteboard Mode ............................................................................ 364

Where to Get Help (U.S. and Canada) ............................................................................................. 364

Technical Specifications ........................................................................................................................ 366

General Projector Specifications ...................................................................................................... 366

Projector Light Source Specifications............................................................................................... 368

Interactive Pen Specifications .......................................................................................................... 368

Touch Unit Specifications ................................................................................................................ 368

Remote Control Specifications ......................................................................................................... 369

Projector Dimension Specifications.................................................................................................. 369

Projector Electrical Specifications .................................................................................................... 369

Projector Environmental Specifications............................................................................................ 370

Projector Safety and Approvals Specifications................................................................................. 371

Safety and Approvals Specifications for Latin America .................................................................... 371

Supported Video Display Formats.................................................................................................... 372

USB Display System Requirements................................................................................................. 375

Notices ..................................................................................................................................................... 376

Recycling (U.S. and Canada)........................................................................................................... 376

Important Safety Information ............................................................................................................ 376

Laser Safety Information .................................................................................................................. 377

Laser Light Source Warning ............................................................................................................ 380

Important Safety Instructions............................................................................................................ 380

Restriction of Use ........................................................................................................................ 385

List of Safety Symbols (corresponding to IEC60950-1 A2)............................................................... 385

FCC Compliance Statement............................................................................................................. 390

Binding Arbitration and Class Waiver ............................................................................................... 391

Trademarks...................................................................................................................................... 394

Copyright Notice............................................................................................................................... 394

A Note Concerning Responsible Use of Copyrighted Materials................................................... 395

Copyright Attribution.................................................................................................................... 395

BrightLink 1480Fi/1485Fi User's Guide

Welcome to the BrightLink 1480Fi/1485Fi User's Guide.

For a printable PDF copy of this guide, click here.

Introduction to Your Projector

Refer to these sections to learn more about your projector and this manual.

Projector Features

Notations Used in the Documentation

Where to Go for Additional Information

Additional Projector Software and Manuals

Projector Part Locations

Projector Features

The BrightLink 1480Fi/1485Fi projector includes these special features:

Unique interactive functions

• Annotation with or without a computer

• Annotation with two pens at the same time (depending on interactive mode, connection method, and

operating system)

• Enhanced Easy Interactive toolbar for Windows and Mac

• Touch-based interactivity for as many as six users (Touch Unit required)

• Control your computer from the projected screen

• Print, save, and send your presentations without a computer

• Scan and display content from a connected scanner

• Import content from a USB drive

• Share your projected content with tablets, smartphones, and other devices

Bright, high-resolution projection system

• Up to 5000 lumens of color brightness (color light output) and white brightness (white light output)

Note: Color brightness (color light output) and white brightness (white light output) will vary depending

on usage conditions. Color light output measured in accordance with IDMS 15.4; white light output

measured in accordance with ISO 21118.

• 1080p native resolution (Pixel shifting technology achieves Full HD resolution on screen.)

Flexible connectivity

• Three HDMI ports for computer or video device connection

• Plug-and-play USB projection and audio for instant setup

• HDBaseT control pad with single connection to projector for simplified cabling and installation

(BrightLink 1485Fi)

• Wired and wireless network support for projection

• Screen mirroring to connect your mobile device wirelessly using Miracast technology

• Projector monitoring and control via remote network computer

• PC Free photo slide shows via connected USB memory devices or Epson document camera (only on

models that support the slide show function)

• One HDMI port for connecting an external display or linking another compatible projector (BrightLink

1485Fi)

• Use Epson iProjection (Windows/Mac) to simultaneously project up to four images from network

computers or mobile devices

• Projection from an iOS device, Android device, or Chromebook with the free Epson iProjection app;

visit epson.com/iprojection (U.S.) or epson.ca/iprojection (Canada) for more information

Innovative display and operation features

• Long-life laser light source

• Support for side-by-side projector mounting with continuous annotation (BrightLink 1485Fi)

• High digital zoom ratio for larger images in shorter projection distances

• 2,500,000:1 contrast ratio and Dynamic Contrast control for sharp, detailed images

• Built-in closed captioning decoder

• Powerful 16 W speaker system with audio out port for connecting external speakers

• Epson's Direct Power On and Auto Power On features for quick and easy setup

• Support for Crestron RoomView network monitoring systems

• Network message broadcast system to project timely messages to all networked projectors

Product Box Contents

Additional Components

Optional Equipment and Replacement Parts

Warranty and Registration Information

Parent topic: Introduction to Your Projector

Product Box Contents

Save all the packaging in case you need to ship the projector. Always use the original packaging (or

equivalent) when shipping.

Make sure your projector box included all of these parts:

1 Projector

2 Remote control

3 Remote control and pen batteries (2 AA rechargeable and 2 AA alkaline; included battery charger

not shown)

4 Interactive pens and replacement pen tips (4 soft tips, 2 hard tips)

5 Control pad (BrightLink 1485Fi)

6 Pen stand (BrightLink 1485Fi)

7 Control pad AC adapter holder (BrightLink 1485Fi)

8 6 ft (1.8 m) USB cable

9 Power cord

10 Touch Unit connection cable (included with BrightLink 1485Fi; optional for BrightLink 1480Fi)

11 Lens cap

12 Touch Unit (included with BrightLink 1485Fi; optional for BrightLink 1480Fi)

13 Markers for Touch Unit setup (included with BrightLink 1485Fi; optional for BrightLink 1480Fi)

14 Cable cover

15 Labels (4)

16 Control pad AC adapter and power cord

17 Tape for securing markers (included with BrightLink 1485Fi; optional for BrightLink 1480Fi)

18 Infrared deflectors (12) (included with BrightLink 1485Fi; optional for BrightLink 1480Fi)

19 Auto image adjustment markers and magnets

20 Spacers for screw holes

21 Touch Unit mounting template (included with BrightLink 1485Fi; optional for BrightLink 1480Fi)

Parent topic: Projector Features

Additional Components

Depending on how you plan to use the projector, you may need to obtain additional components.

Note: To connect a Mac that does not include a compatible video output port, you need to obtain an

adapter that allows you to connect to an input port on the projector. Contact Apple for compatible

adapter options. To connect a smartphone or tablet, you may need to obtain an adapter that allows you

to connect to the projector. This allows you to mirror your smartphone or tablet screens, watch movies,

and more. Contact your device manufacturer for compatible adapter options.

Unless listed as available from Epson in this table, see your local computer or electronics dealer for

purchase information.

Signal or connection

type

Additional component necessary

Composite video RCA-style video or A/V cable

HDMI Compatible HDMI cable

Available for purchase from Epson or an authorized Epson reseller.

Note: Older Mac computers (2009 and earlier) may not support HDMI

audio.

Audio from certain ports Commercially available audio cable compatible with your device

VGA To connect a computer through its VGA port to the projector's VGA video

port, you need a VGA computer cable.

Multiple BrightLink

projectors

To sync additional BrightLink projectors together, you need a stereo mini

cable (commercially available) or the remote control cable set (ELPKC28).

Available for purchase from Epson or an authorized Epson reseller.

Parent topic: Projector Features

Optional Equipment and Replacement Parts

You can purchase screens, other optional accessories, and replacement parts from an Epson authorized

reseller. To find the nearest reseller, call 800-GO-EPSON (800-463-7766) in the U.S. or 800-807-7766 in

Canada. Or you can purchase online at epsonstore.com (U.S. sales) or epsonstore.ca (Canadian sales).

Epson offers the following optional accessories and replacement parts for your projector:

Option or part Part number

Replacement air filter (ELPAF56) V13H134A56

Ultra-short throw wall mount (ELPMB62) V12HA06A05

Finger Touch Unit (ELPFT01) V12H007A23

Wireless LAN module (ELPAP11) V12H005A02

Epson DC-07 document camera (ELPDC07) V12H759020

Epson DC-11 document camera (ELPDC11) V12H377020

Epson DC-12 document camera (ELPDC12) V12H594020

Option or part Part number

Epson DC-13 document camera (ELPDC13) V12H757020

Epson DC-20 document camera (ELPDC20) V12H500020

Epson DC-21 document camera (ELPDC21) V12H758020

PowerLite Pilot 3 connection and control box (ELPCB03) V12H927020

Active speakers (ELPSP02) V12H467020

Additional interactive pen A (ELPPN05A) (orange) V12H773010

Additional interactive pen B (ELPPN05B) (blue) V12H774010

Replacement set of hard pen tips (ELPPS03) V12H775010

Replacement set of soft pen tips (ELPPS04) V12H776010

Remote control cable set (ELPKC28) V12H005C28

100 inch (254 cm) 16:9 whiteboard (DaLite) V12H006A01

100 inch (254 cm) 16:9 whiteboard (MooreCo) V12H006A02

Touch Unit mounting bracket (ELPMB63) V12HA05A09

USB extension cable (ELPKC31) V12H525001

PixiePlus control system ELPSP10

In addition to the accessories listed above, 1-year and 2-year extended service plans are available.

Parent topic: Projector Features

Related references

Where to Get Help (U.S. and Canada)

Warranty and Registration Information

Your projector comes with a basic warranty that lets you project with confidence. For details, see the

warranty that came with your projector.

In addition, Epson offers free Extra Care Road Service. In the unlikely event of an equipment failure, you

won’t have to wait for your unit to be repaired. Instead, Epson will ship you a replacement unit anywhere

in the United States, Canada, or Puerto Rico. See the Extra Care Road Service brochure for details.

Note: Availability varies by region.

Registering also lets you receive special updates on new accessories, products, and services.

Parent topic: Projector Features

Notations Used in the Documentation

Follow the guidelines in these notations as you read your documentation:

•Warnings must be followed carefully to avoid bodily injury.

•Cautions must be observed to avoid damage to your equipment.

•Notes contain important information about your projector.

•Tips contain additional projection information.

Parent topic: Introduction to Your Projector

Where to Go for Additional Information

Need quick help on using your projector? Here's where to look for help:

•Guidance icon in the Other Tools menu of the interactive toolbar

Select the Guidance icon to display the help screen for toolbar functions.

•epson.com/support (U.S.), epson.ca/support (Canada), or latin.epson.com/support (Caribbean)

View FAQs (frequently asked questions) and e-mail your questions to Epson technical support 24

hours a day.

• If you still need help after checking this manual and any other sources listed here, you can use the

Epson PrivateLine Support service to get help fast. For details, see "Where to Get Help."

Parent topic: Introduction to Your Projector

Related references

Where to Get Help (U.S. and Canada)

Additional Projector Software and Manuals

After connecting and setting up the projector, install the projector software as necessary. You may need

to install it from a software CD, if included, or download the software and manuals as necessary.

You can install the projector software programs listed here and view their manuals for instructions on

using them.

Note: If you still need help after checking this manual and the sources listed here, you can use the

Epson PrivateLine Support service to get help fast. For details, see "Where to Get Help."

Projector software Manual Description

Epson Projector

Management (Windows

only)

Epson Projector

Management Operation

Guide

Lets you monitor and control your projector

through the network.

You can download the latest software and

documentation from the Epson web site. Go to

epson.com/support (U.S.) or epson.ca/support

(Canada) and select your projector.

Epson iProjection

(Windows/Mac)

Epson iProjection

Operation Guide

(Windows/Mac)

Lets you project the computer screens of

users over a network.

You can download the latest software and

documentation from the Epson web site. Go to

epson.com/support (U.S.) or epson.ca/support

(Canada) and select your projector.

Epson iProjection app Instructions are included

with the app

Lets you project from an iOS device, Android

device, or Chromebook if your projector is

connected to a network that includes a

wireless access point.

Visit epson.com/iprojection (U.S.) or

epson.ca/iprojection (Canada) for more

information.

Easy Interactive Tools

(Windows/Mac)

Easy Interactive Tools

Operation Guide

Lets you use your computer to interactively

draw on projected images (Mac users also

need to install the Easy Interactive Driver)

You can download the latest software and

documentation from the Epson web site. Go to

epson.com/support (U.S.) or epson.ca/support

(Canada) and select your projector.

—Open Source Software

License

You can download this document from the

Epson web site. Go to epson.com/support

(U.S.) or epson.ca/support (Canada) and

select your projector.

Parent topic: Introduction to Your Projector

Projector Part Locations

Check the projector part illustrations to learn about the parts on your projector.

Note: The BrightLink 1485Fi is shown in most illustrations in this manual, unless noted otherwise.

Projector Parts - Front/Side

Projector Parts - Top/Side

Projector Parts - Interface

Projector Parts - Base

Projector Parts - Control Panel

Projector Parts - Remote Control

Projector Parts - Interactive Pens

Projector Parts - Pen Stand (BrightLink 1485Fi)

Projector Parts - Control Pad (BrightLink 1485Fi)

Projector Parts - Touch Unit

Parent topic: Introduction to Your Projector

Projector Parts - Front/Side

1 Power button

2 Status lights

3 Remote control receiver

4 Exhaust vent

5 Front cover

6 Control panel

7 Focus lever

8 Speakers

Parent topic: Projector Part Locations

Related references

Projector Light Status

Projector Parts - Top/Side

1 Interactive pen receiver

2 Projection lens

3 Remote receiver

4 Cable cover screws

5 Cable cover

6 Air filter cover

7 Air intake vent (air filter)

8 Power inlet

9 Security cable installation slot

Parent topic: Projector Part Locations

Projector Parts - Interface

1HDMI Out port

2HDBaseT port (BrightLink 1485Fi)

3Mic port

4HDMI1/HDMI2/HDMI3 ports

5Computer1/Computer2 Monitor Out ports

6LAN port

7USB-B1/USB-B2 ports

8USB-A1/USB-A2 ports

9SYNC In/Out ports

10 TCH port for the Touch Unit connection cable

11 Video port

12 Audio/Audio1/Audio2 ports

13 Audio Out port

14 RS-232C port

15 DC Out (2.0A) port

Parent topic: Projector Part Locations

Related concepts

Projector Connections

Projector Parts - Base

1 Security cable attachment point

2 Wall mounting plate holes (4)

3 VESA-compatible mount fixing points (4)

4 Air intake vent

Parent topic: Projector Part Locations

Projector Parts - Control Panel

1Menu button (accesses projector menu system)

2Home button (accesses projector Home screen)

3Enter button (selects options)

4 Vertical keystone adjustment buttons (display the adjustment screen and adjust screen shape)

and arrow buttons

5Source Search button (searches for connected video sources)

6Esc button (cancels/exits functions)

7W/T(Wide/Tele) buttons (adjust projected image size) and arrow buttons

Parent topic: Projector Part Locations

Projector Parts - Remote Control

1 Power button

2HDMI button (cycles through connected HDMI sources)

3Computer button

4 Numeric buttons

5Auto button (automatically adjusts position, tracking, and sync settings)

6Num button (when held down, switches numeric buttons to number function)

7Menu button (accesses projector menu system)

8 Arrow buttons (move through on-screen options)

9 Enter button (selects options)

10 User button (customizable for different functions)

11 Color Mode button (selects display modes)

12 Aspect button (selects the image aspect ratio)

13 E-Zoom +/–buttons (zoom into and out of the image)

14 A/V Mute button (turns off picture and sound)

15 Split button (splits the screen between two image sources)

16 Home button (accesses projector Home screen)

17 Freeze button (stops video action)

18 Volume up/down buttons (adjust speaker volume)

19 Default button (resets the selected setting to its default value)

20 Esc button (cancels/exits functions and controls wireless mouse functions)

21 ID button (selects a projector to use with the remote control)

22 LAN button (connects to a network source)

23 USB button (cycles through connected USB sources)

24 Source Search button (searches for connected sources)

25 Remote control emitter

Parent topic: Projector Part Locations

Projector Parts - Interactive Pens

1 Pen tip

2 Battery light

3 Function button

4 Attachment for optional strap or cord

5 Battery cover

Parent topic: Projector Part Locations

Projector Parts - Pen Stand (BrightLink 1485Fi)

1 Front cover

2 Pen tip storage area

3 Pen storage area

4 Battery storage area

5 Wall mounting holes

6 Installation magnet

Parent topic: Projector Part Locations

Projector Parts - Control Pad (BrightLink 1485Fi)

1 Front cover

2 Indicator lights

3 Power button

4HDMI1/HDMI2 buttons

5USB-A port

6USB-B port

7HDMI1/HDMI2 input ports

8 Upper cable path

9 Mounting screw holes

10 HDBaseT port

11 USB-B port (to projector)

12 Power inlet cable path

13 Power inlet

Parent topic: Projector Part Locations

Projector Parts - Touch Unit

The Touch Unit is included with the BrightLink 1485Fi and optional for the BrightLink 1480Fi.

Front/Top

Back

1 Installation screw holes

2 Laser diffusion port

3 Indicator light

4 Installation screw holes

5 Security cable installation slot

6TCH port

7 Installation magnets

Parent topic: Projector Part Locations

Setting Up the Projector

Follow the instructions in these sections to set up your projector for use.

Projector Placement

Removing and Attaching the Cable Cover

Projector Connections

Installing Batteries in the Remote Control

Installing Batteries in the Pens

Projector Placement

Your ultra-short throw projector is designed to be installed on a wall (with a wall mount) or vertically on a

table (with a table mount) to create an interactive tabletop workspace.

You can also place the projector on a flat surface such as a desk or table to project in a portable setup.

Note: A Touch Unit is optional for the BrightLink 1480Fi and must be installed for finger touch operation.

Finger touch operation is available only if the projector is installed on a wall (with a wall mount) and

projecting from the front of the wall, or vertically on a table (with a table mount) and projecting from the

top of the table.

Keep these considerations in mind as you select a projector location:

• Follow the instructions in the online Installation Guide to install the projector.

• Leave plenty of space around and under the projector for ventilation, and do not place it on top of or

next to anything that could block the vents.

• If you are using the projector at altitudes above 4921 feet (1500 m), set the High Altitude Mode

setting to On in the projector's Installation menu to ensure the projector's internal temperature is

regulated properly.

• Position the projector within reach of a grounded electrical outlet or extension cord.

• If installing vertically on a table, a commercially available mount compatible with the VESA Mounting

Interface Standard (100 x 100 mm) is required.

• If installing on a wall, the wall mount (V12HA06A05) is required.

• If the projector is not mounted, place it on a sturdy, level surface.

• For finger touch, make sure the projection surface is flat, smooth, and unwarped with no more than

0.2 inch (5 mm) of unevenness in any direction.

• Place the projector so it squarely faces the screen, not at an angle. If you cannot install the projector

squarely facing the screen, correct any resulting image distortion using the projector controls.

• Try not to set up the projector in locations subject to high humidity and dust, or in locations subject to

smoke from fires or tobacco smoke.

Projector Setup and Installation Options

Projection Distance

Parent topic: Setting Up the Projector

Projector Setup and Installation Options

You can set up or install your projector in the following ways:

Mounted on the wall or ceiling

Mounted vertically on a table to create an interactive workspace

Mounted on the wall or ceiling and projecting from behind a translucent screen (interactive features not

supported)

Mounted vertically and projecting from underneath a table (interactive features not supported)

Front projection from a table or portable cart (finger touch not supported)

Rear projection from a table or portable cart behind a translucent screen (interactive features not

supported)

Wherever you set up the projector, make sure to position it squarely in front of the screen, not at an

angle.

If you place the projector vertically, turn on the Vertical Installation setting in the projector's Installation

menu.

If you install the projector to a fixed location, turn on the Fixed Installation setting in the projector's

Installation menu.

If you project from a table or portable cart, be sure to select the correct Projection option in the

projector's menu system.

Note: You cannot use the interactive pens or finger touch when projecting from behind a screen or under

a table.

Parent topic: Projector Placement

Projection Distance

The distance at which you place the projector from the screen determines the approximate size of the

image. The image size increases the farther the projector is from the screen, but can vary depending on

the zoom factor, aspect ratio, and other settings.

Refer to the tables in the online Installation Guide to determine approximately how far to place the

projector from the screen based on the size of the projected image. (Conversion figures may have been

rounded up or down.) You can also use the Projection Distance Calculator here (U.S.), here (Canada),

or here (Caribbean).

Parent topic: Projector Placement

Removing and Attaching the Cable Cover

Before you can connect equipment to your projector, you need to remove the cable cover.

1. Loosen both of the screws securing the cable cover and lift off the cable cover.

To attach the cable cover, replace the cable cover and tighten the cable cover screws.

Parent topic: Setting Up the Projector

Projector Connections

See these sections to connect the projector to a variety of projection sources.

Caution: If you will use the projector at altitudes above 4921 feet (1500 m), turn on High Altitude Mode

to ensure the projector's internal temperature is regulated properly.

Connecting to Computer Sources

Connecting to Video Sources

Connecting External Output Devices

Connecting a Microphone

Connecting to External USB Devices

Connecting to a Document Camera

Connecting a Printer to the Control Pad

Connecting Multiple Projectors of the Same Model

Parent topic: Setting Up the Projector

Related references

Additional Components

Installation Settings - Installation Menu

Connecting to Computer Sources

Follow the instructions in these sections to connect a computer to the projector.

Connecting to a Computer for USB Video and Audio

Connecting to a Computer for VGA Video

Connecting to a Computer for HDMI Video and Audio

Connecting to a Computer for Pen and Finger Use

Connecting a Computer to the Control Pad

Connecting to a Computer for Sound

Parent topic: Projector Connections

Connecting to a Computer for USB Video and Audio

If your computer meets the system requirements, you can send video and audio output to the projector

through the computer's USB port (preferably USB 2.0). Connect the projector to your computer using a

USB cable.

Note: This also lets you use the interactive pens with your computer. You need to change the USB

Display setting to On in the projector's Signal I/O menu before you can project through the USB port.

Note that using USB Display will slow interactive pen function. For the best performance, VGA or HDMI

connections are recommended.

Note: A USB connection may cause a delay for content requiring high bandwidth, such as movies. An

HDMI connection is recommended for projecting movies, video games, and other home entertainment

content.

1. Turn on your computer.

2. Connect the cable to your projector's USB-B1 port.

Note: If you use a USB hub, the connection may not operate properly. Connect the USB cable

directly to the projector. When using the control pad (BrightLink 1485Fi), the projector cannot detect

the image signal input from the projector's USB-B port. Connect the USB cable to the control pad.

3. Connect the other end to any available USB port on your computer.

4. To use USB Display, do one of the following:

•Windows 10/Windows 8.x: Click EPSON_PJ_UD in the upper right-corner, then select Run

EMP_UDSE.exe in the dialog box that appears to install the Epson USB Display software.

•Windows 7/Windows Vista: Select Run EMP_UDSE.exe in the dialog box that appears to install

the Epson USB Display software.

•Mac: The USB Display setup folder appears on your screen. Select USB Display Installer and

follow the on-screen instructions to install the Epson USB Display software.

Follow any on-screen instructions. You need to install this software only the first time you connect

the projector to the computer.

The projector displays the image from your computer's desktop and outputs sound, if your presentation

contains audio.

Parent topic: Connecting to Computer Sources

Related references

Input Signal Settings - Signal I/O Menu

Connecting to a Computer for VGA Video

You can connect the projector to your computer using a VGA computer cable.

Note: To connect a Mac that does not include a compatible video output port, you need to obtain an

adapter that allows you to connect to an input port on the projector. Contact Apple for compatible

adapter options. To connect a smartphone or tablet, you may need to obtain an adapter that allows you

to connect to the projector. This allows you to mirror your smartphone or tablet screens, watch movies,

and more. Contact your device manufacturer for compatible adapter options.

Note: To project an image source connected to the Computer2/Monitor Out port, set Monitor Out Port

to Computer2 in the projector's Signal I/O menu.

1. If necessary, disconnect your computer's monitor cable.

2. Connect the VGA computer cable to your computer's monitor port.

3. Connect the other end to a Computer port on the projector.

4. Tighten the screws on the VGA connector.

Parent topic: Connecting to Computer Sources

Connecting to a Computer for HDMI Video and Audio

If your computer has an HDMI port, you can connect it to the projector using an optional HDMI cable.

Note: To connect a Mac that does not include a compatible video output port, you need to obtain an

adapter that allows you to connect to an input port on the projector. Contact Apple for compatible

adapter options. To connect a smartphone or tablet, you may need to obtain an adapter that allows you

to connect to the projector. This allows you to mirror your smartphone or tablet screens, watch movies,

and more. Contact your device manufacturer for compatible adapter options.

1. Connect the HDMI cable to your computer's HDMI output port.

2. Connect the other end to one of the projector's HDMI ports.

Note: If you have problems hearing audio through the HDMI connection, connect one end of an optional

3.5 mm stereo mini-jack audio cable to the projector's Audio port and the other end to your computer's

audio out port. Then select the audio port you connected to as the HDMI Audio Output setting in the

Signal I/O menu.

Parent topic: Connecting to Computer Sources

Connecting to a Computer for Pen and Finger Use

If you connected your computer to a Computer or HDMI port on the projector, you also need to connect

the USB cable so you can use the pens and your fingers with your computer.

Note: A Touch Unit is optional for the BrightLink 1480Fi and must be installed for finger touch operation.

Note: If your computer is connected to an HDMI input on the control pad (BrightLink 1485Fi), connect

the computer's USB cable to the control pad's USB-B port.

1. Connect the USB cable to your projector's USB-B1 port.

Note: If your computer is connected to the projector's HDMI3 port, connect the USB cable to the

projector's USB-B2 port. You can change the HDMI port associated with the USB-B2 port by

changing the USB-B2 setting in the projector's Pen/Touch >PC Interactivity menu.

2. Connect the other end to any available USB port on your computer.

Parent topic: Connecting to Computer Sources

Related references

Pen and Touch Setup Settings - Pen/Touch Menu

Connecting a Computer to the Control Pad

If your computer has an HDMI port, you can connect it to the projector's control pad (BrightLink 1485Fi)

using an HDMI cable.

Note: To connect a Mac that includes only a Mini DisplayPort, Thunderbolt port, or Mini-DVI port for

video output, you need to obtain an adapter that allows you to connect to the projector's HDMI port.

Contact Apple for compatible adapter options. Older Mac computers (2009 and earlier) may not support

audio through the HDMI port.

1. Turn on your projector and computer, if necessary.

2. Enable Connect ELPHD02 in the HDBaseT settings of the projector's Signal I/O menu.

3. Connect an HDMI cable to the In1 or In2 port on the bottom of the control pad, then connect the

other end of the cable to any available HDMI port on your computer.

4. Press the 1or 2button on the control pad to select the port your computer is connected to.

The projector switches the input source to HDBaseT, displays the image from your computer's

desktop, and outputs sound, if your presentation contains audio.

5. If you want to operate your computer from the projected screen using the interactive pens or your

fingers, connect the USB cable to the USB-B port on the bottom of the control pad and any available

USB port on your computer.

Parent topic: Connecting to Computer Sources

Connecting to a Computer for Sound

If your computer presentation includes sound and you did not connect it to a projector port that receives

audio signals, you can still play sound through the projector's speaker system. Just connect an optional

3.5 mm stereo mini-jack audio cable as described here.

Note: Make sure the audio cable you use is labeled "No resistance."

1. Connect the audio cable to your laptop's headphone or audio-out jack, or your desktop's speaker or

audio-out port.

2. Connect the other end to the Audio port that corresponds to the Computer port you are using.

Parent topic: Connecting to Computer Sources

Connecting to Video Sources

Follow the instructions in these sections to connect video devices to the projector.

Connecting to an HDMI Video Source

Connecting to a Composite Video Source

Connecting to a Video Source for Sound

Parent topic: Projector Connections

Connecting to an HDMI Video Source

If your video source has an HDMI port, you can connect it to the projector using an optional HDMI cable.

The HDMI connection provides the best image quality. You can also connect your video source to an

HDMI port on the control pad (BrightLink 1485Fi).

Caution: Do not turn on the video source before connecting it to the projector. Doing so could damage

the projector.

Note: If you are connecting a video source to an HDMI port on the control pad, enable Connect

ELPHD02 in the HDBaseT settings of the projector's Signal I/O menu.

1. Connect the HDMI cable to your video source's HDMI output port.

2. Connect the other end to one of the projector's HDMI ports.

Note: If you have problems hearing audio through the HDMI connection, you can use one of the

projector's audio ports instead to play sound. Connect one end of an optional 3.5 mm stereo mini-jack

audio cable to one of the projector's audio ports and the other end to your computer's audio out port.

Then select the audio port you connected to as the HDMI Audio Output setting in the Signal I/O menu.

Parent topic: Connecting to Video Sources

Related references

Input Signal Settings - Signal I/O Menu

Connecting to a Composite Video Source

If your video source has a composite video port, you can connect it to the projector using an optional

RCA-style video or A/V cable.

1. Connect the cable with the yellow connector to your video source's yellow video output port.

2. Connect the other end to the projector's Video port.

Parent topic: Connecting to Video Sources

Connecting to a Video Source for Sound

You can play sound through the projector's speaker system if your video source has audio output ports.

If you are projecting video using the Video or a Computer port, connect the projector to the video source

using an optional stereo mini-jack audio cable.

Note: If you connected your video source to the projector using an HDMI cable, the audio signal is

transferred with the video signal; you do not need an additional cable for sound.

1. Connect the audio cable to your video source's audio-out ports.

2. Connect the other end of the cable to the projector's Audio port that corresponds to the Computer

or Video port you are using for video.

Parent topic: Connecting to Video Sources

Connecting External Output Devices

See these sections to connect the projector to external output devices.

Connecting to an External Computer Monitor

Connecting to an External HDMI Monitor

Connecting to External Speakers

Parent topic: Projector Connections

Connecting to an External Computer Monitor

If you connected a computer to the projector's Computer1 port, you can also connect an external

monitor to the projector. This lets you see your presentation on the external monitor even when the

projected image is not visible.

To output images to an external VGA monitor, set the Monitor Out Port setting to Monitor Out in the

projector's Signal I/O menu.

If you want to output images to an external monitor when the projector is not projecting any images, you

need to select Always On as the A/V Output setting in the projector's Signal I/O menu.

Note: Monitors that use a refresh rate less than 60 Hz may not be able to display images correctly.

1. Make sure your computer is connected to the projector's Computer port. If there are two computer

ports, make sure you use the Computer1 port.

2. Connect the external monitor's cable to your projector's Computer2/Monitor Out port.

Note: Content you draw using the built-in interactive features is not displayed on an external monitor

unless you draw it using Easy Interactive Tools software.

Parent topic: Connecting External Output Devices

Related references

Input Signal Settings - Signal I/O Menu

Connecting to an External HDMI Monitor

You can connect an external HDMI monitor to the projector's HDMI Out port and use it to display

projected content from the currently selected input source (except for the Home screen and images from

a Screen Mirroring source).

1. Connect an HDMI cable to your monitor's HDMI input port.

2. Connect the other end to the projector's HDMI Out port.

Parent topic: Connecting External Output Devices

Connecting to External Speakers

To enhance the sound from your presentation, you can connect the projector to external self-powered

speakers. You can control the volume using the projector's remote control.

You can also connect the projector to an amplifier with speakers.

Set the Audio Out Device setting to AV System in the projector's Signal I/O menu. When an

audio/video system is not connected to the projector, audio is output from the external speakers even if

Audio Out Device is set to AV System.

If you want to output audio from the external speakers when the projector is not projecting images, you

need to select Always On as the A/V Output setting in the projector's Signal I/O menu.

Note: The projector's built-in speaker system is disabled when you connect external speakers.

1. Make sure your computer or video source is connected to the projector with both audio and video

cables as necessary.

2. Locate the appropriate cable to connect your external speakers, such as a stereo mini-jack-to-pin-

jack cable, or another type of cable or adapter.

3. Connect one end of the cable to your external speakers as necessary.

4. Connect the stereo mini-jack end of the cable to your projector's Audio Out port.

Parent topic: Connecting External Output Devices

Related references

Input Signal Settings - Signal I/O Menu

Connecting a Microphone

You can connect a microphone to the projector's Mic port to provide audio support during presentations.

Note: The projector does not support plug-in-power microphones. If you want to output audio from the

microphone when the projector is not projecting images, select Always On as the A/V Output setting in

the Signal I/O menu.

1. Connect the microphone cable to the projector's Mic port.

2. Turn on the microphone, if necessary.

3. If you hear a crackling noise or the volume is too high or low, adjust the Mic Input Level setting in

the Signal I/O menu.

Parent topic: Projector Connections

Related references

Input Signal Settings - Signal I/O Menu

Connecting to External USB Devices

Follow the instructions in these sections to connect external USB devices to the projector.

USB Device Projection

Connecting a USB Device or Camera to the Projector

Connecting a USB Device to the Control Pad

Selecting the Connected USB Source

Disconnecting a USB Device From the Control Pad or Projector

Parent topic: Projector Connections

Related tasks

Starting a PC Free Slideshow

USB Device Projection

You can project images and other content without using a computer or video device by connecting any of

these devices to your projector or to the control pad (BrightLink 1485Fi):

• USB flash drive

• Digital camera or smartphone

• USB hard drive

Note: Digital cameras or smartphones must be USB-mounted devices, not TWAIN-compliant devices,

and must be USB Mass Storage Class-compliant.

Note: USB hard drives must meet these requirements:

• USB Mass Storage Class-compliant (not all USB Mass Storage Class devices are supported)

• Formatted in FAT16 or FAT32

• Self-powered by their own AC power supplies (bus-powered hard drives are not recommended)

• Does not have multiple partitions

You can project slide shows from image files on a connected USB device.

Parent topic: Connecting to External USB Devices

Related tasks

Starting a PC Free Slideshow

Connecting a USB Device or Camera to the Projector

You can connect your USB device or camera to the projector's USB-A port and use it to project images

and other content.

1. If your USB device came with a power adapter, plug the device into an electrical outlet.

2. Connect the USB cable (or USB flash drive) to one of the projector's USB-A ports.

Note: Use the USB cable supplied with or specified for use with your device. Do not connect a USB

hub or a USB cable longer than 10 feet (3 m), or the device may not operate correctly.

3. Connect the other end of the cable (if applicable) to your device.

Parent topic: Connecting to External USB Devices

Related tasks

Starting a PC Free Slideshow

Connecting a USB Device to the Control Pad

You can connect your USB device to the USB-A port on the control pad (BrightLink 1485Fi) and use it to

project images and other content.

1. If your USB device came with a power adapter, plug the device into an electrical outlet.

2. Connect a USB cable to either USB-A port on the projector and to the upper USB-B port on the

control pad.

3. Enable Connect ELPHD02 in the HDBaseT settings of the projector's Signal I/O menu.

4. Connect the USB cable for the device (or a USB flash drive ) to the USB-A port on the bottom of the

control pad.

5. Connect the other end of the cable (if applicable) to your device.

Note: You can also connect a USB device directly to one of the projector's USB-A ports.

Parent topic: Connecting to External USB Devices

Related tasks

Starting a PC Free Slideshow

Selecting the Connected USB Source

You can switch the projector's display to the source you connected to one of the USB-A ports. To display

the connected USB device, select the USB1 source.

Note: If you have connected a document camera using a USB cable, select the USB2 source.

1. Make sure the connected USB source is turned on, if necessary.

2. Press the USB or Source Search button on the remote control and select the USB1 or USB2

source.

Parent topic: Connecting to External USB Devices

Related tasks

Starting a PC Free Slideshow

Disconnecting a USB Device From the Control Pad or Projector

When you finish presenting with a connected USB device, you must prepare to disconnect the device

from the control pad (BrightLink 1485Fi) or projector.

1. If the device has a power button, turn off and unplug the device.

2. Disconnect the USB device (or cable) from the control pad (BrightLink 1485Fi) or projector.

Parent topic: Connecting to External USB Devices

Related tasks

Starting a PC Free Slideshow

Connecting to a Document Camera

You can connect a document camera to your projector to project images viewed by the camera.

Depending on the document camera model, you can also control it using the interactive features.

Note: If you connect a document camera to one of the USB-A ports on the projector, select the USB2

source to display the image. You cannot simultaneously connect two document cameras to the USB-A

ports.

Depending on your Epson document camera model, do one of the following to connect the document

camera to your projector:

• For the Epson DC-07 document camera, locate the USB cable that came with the camera and

connect it to the projector's port and to the document camera's USB Type B port.

• For the Epson DC-11 document camera, connect it to the projector's Computer or Video port and to

the corresponding port on the document camera. See the document camera manual for details.

• For the Epson DC-12 document camera, connect it to the projector's HDMI,Computer, or Video port

and to the corresponding port on the document camera. See the document camera manual for details.

• For the Epson DC-13 document camera, connect it to the projector's HDMI,Computer, or Video port

and to the corresponding port on the document camera. See the document camera manual for details.

• For the Epson DC-20 document camera, connect it to the projector's HDMI,Computer, or Video port

and to the corresponding port on the document camera. See the document camera manual for details.

• For the Epson DC-21 document camera, connect it to the projector's HDMI,Computer, or Video port

and to the corresponding port on the document camera. See the document camera manual for details.

Note: For additional features supported by software, connect your document camera to your computer

instead of the projector. See the document camera manual for details.

Parent topic: Projector Connections

Connecting a Printer to the Control Pad

You can connect an Epson printer or all-in-one device to the USB-A port on the control pad (BrightLink

1485Fi) and use it to print your projected and annotated content. Make sure the printer meets the control

command requirements.

Note: You can connect a wireless printer by selecting Network Printer as the Print >Printer setting in

the Interactive menu.

1. Connect a USB cable to one of the USB-A ports on the projector and to the USB-B port at the top of

the control pad.

2. Connect another USB cable to the USB-A port on the bottom of the control pad. Make sure the cable

is no longer than 16.4 ft (5 m).

3. Connect the other end of the cable to the USB Type B port on the printer.

Parent topic: Projector Connections

Related references

Interactive Settings - Interactive Menu

Connecting Multiple Projectors of the Same Model

You can connect up to four projectors of the same model in the same room to project a single unified

image (BrightLink 1485Fi).

Note: The interactive features are available only when connecting two projectors (DuoLink). The two

projectors must be synchronized using the optional remote control cable set (V12H005C28) and a USB-

A to USB-B cable.

1. Connect the computer and the projectors using HDMI cables as shown.

Note: If you are connecting three or more projectors, connect the projectors in a chain as shown.

2. If you are using interactive features, connect one end of the stereo mini cable to the SYNC Out port

starting from the projector on the left, and connect the other end to the SYNC In port on the other

projector.

3. If you are using interactive features, connect the computer and the projectors using USB cables as

shown.

Note: When you set the USB-B2 setting to Off in the projector's Pen/Touch menu, connect the USB

cable to the other projector's USB-B1 port. When you set the USB-B2 setting to anything other than

Off, connect the USB cable to the other projector's USB-B2 port.

4. After making the appropriate connections, you need to adjust the necessary projector menu settings.

Click the link below.

Note: You may need to restart the projector. Follow the on-screen instructions.

Multiple Projector Connection Menu Settings

Parent topic: Projector Connections

Related concepts

Using Multiple Projectors (DuoLink)

Related references

Multiple Projector Connection Menu Settings

Related tasks

Connecting Multiple Projectors of the Same Model

Multiple Projector Connection Menu Settings

After connecting multiple projectors to project a unified image, see the tables below to select the correct

projector menu settings. Make sure your computer is connected to Projector 1 (the left-most projector in

your setup).

Interactive Setup (2 Projectors)

Setting Projector 1 Projector 2

Image Menu

Color Mode Multi-Projection Multi-Projection

Signal I/O Menu

EDID 3240 x 1080/60Hz 3240 x 1080/60Hz

Pen/Touch Menu

Installation of

Projectors >Sync of

Projectors

Wired Wired

Multi-Projection Menu

HDMI Out Setting Process Out Process Out

Order Specify the position of the projectors in number order from left to right

Connect Computer Yes No

Setting Projector 1 Projector 2

Edge Blending >

select any edge >

Blend Start Position

0 0

Edge Blending >

select any edge >

Blend Range

600 600

Note: If you are using the projectors in the same room as another projector that does not support multi-

projector connections, set the Installation of Projectors >Infrared Intensity setting to Strong.

Non-interactive Setup (2-4 Projectors)

Setting Projector 1 Projectors 2-4

Image Menu

Color Mode Multi-Projection Multi-Projection

Multi-Projection Menu

HDMI Out Setting Pass Through Pass Through

Number of Projectors Specify the number of projectors connected in a series

Order Specify the position of the projectors in number order from left to right

Parent topic: Connecting Multiple Projectors of the Same Model

Installing Batteries in the Remote Control

The remote control uses the two AA batteries that came with the projector. Replace the batteries as soon

as they run out.

Caution: Use only the type of batteries specified in this manual. Do not install batteries of different types,

or mix new and old batteries.

1. Remove the battery cover.

2. Insert the batteries with the +and –ends facing as shown.

Warning: Make sure the batteries are inserted in the correct positions. If the batteries are not

inserted correctly, they could explode or leak, causing a fire, injury, or damage to the product.

3. Replace the battery cover and press it down until it clicks into place.

Warning: Dispose of used batteries according to local regulations. Do not expose batteries to heat

or flame. Keep batteries out of the reach of children; they are choking hazards and are very

dangerous if swallowed.

Parent topic: Setting Up the Projector

Installing Batteries in the Pens

Each pen uses one AA battery. Replace the battery as soon as it runs out.

1. Remove the battery cover as shown.

2. Insert the battery with the +and –ends facing as shown.

Warning: Make sure the batteries are inserted in the correct positions. If the batteries are not

inserted correctly, they could explode or leak, causing a fire, injury, or damage to the product.

3. Replace the battery cover and press it down until it clicks into place.

Warning: Dispose of used batteries according to local regulations. Do not expose batteries to heat

or flame. Keep batteries out of the reach of children; they are choking hazards and are very

dangerous if swallowed.

Parent topic: Setting Up the Projector

Using the Projector on a Network

Follow the instructions in these sections to set up your projector for use on a network.

Note: The interactive features may be slower over a network connection than over a USB connection.

Wired Network Projection

Wireless Network Projection

Wireless Network Projection from a Mobile Device or Windows Computer (Screen Mirroring)

Setting Up Projector Network E-Mail Alerts

Setting Up Monitoring Using SNMP

Controlling a Networked Projector Using a Web Browser

Creating an Address Book

Using Crestron Connected

Registering a Digital Certificate on the Projector

Wired Network Projection

You can project through a wired network. To do this, you connect the projector to your network with an

Ethernet cable, and then set up your projector and computer for network projection.

After connecting and setting up the projector, install the projector software. You may need to install it

from a software CD, if included, or download the software and manuals as necessary.

Note: If your projector is connected via a LAN (Ethernet) cable to a network that includes a wireless

access point, you can connect to the projector wirelessly through the access point using the Epson

network software.

Connecting to a Wired Network

Selecting Wired Network Settings

Parent topic: Using the Projector on a Network

Related references

Additional Projector Software and Manuals

Connecting to a Wired Network

To connect the projector to a wired local area network (LAN), use a 100Base-TX or 10Base-T network

cable. To ensure proper data transmission, use a Category 5 shielded cable or higher.

1. Connect one end of the network cable to your network hub, switch, or router.

2. Connect the other end of the cable to the projector's LAN port.

Parent topic: Wired Network Projection

Selecting Wired Network Settings

Before you can project from computers on your network, you must select the network settings for the

projector using its menu system.

Note: Make sure you already connected the projector to your wired network using the LAN port.

1. Turn on the projector.

2. Press the Menu button.

3. Select the Network menu and press Enter.

4. Select Network Settings and press Enter.

5. Select Projector Name and enter a name up to 16 alphanumeric characters long to identify the

projector on a network.

6. Set the Priority Control Interface setting to Wired LAN.

7. Select the Wired LAN menu and press Enter.

8. Select IP Settings and press Enter.

9. Select your IP settings as necessary:

• If your network assigns addresses automatically, turn on the DHCP setting.

• If you must set addresses manually, turn off DHCP and enter the projector's IP Address,Subnet

Mask, and Gateway Address as needed.

Note: To highlight the numbers you want from the displayed keyboard, press the arrow buttons on

the remote control. To select a highlighted number, press Enter. Alternatively, press and hold the

Num button on the remote control while entering the desired numbers.

10. To prevent display of the IP address on the standby screen, turn off IP Address Display in the

Wired LAN menu.

11. Select Return and press Enter to return to the Network Settings menu.

12. Select Network Projection and press Enter.

You see a screen like this:

13. Turn on the Projector Keyword setting if you want to prevent access to the projector by anyone not

in the room with it.

14. Set the Epson iProjection setting to On.

15. Select the following options as necessary:

•Display LAN Info lets you select how the projector displays network information. You can select

an option to display a QR code that lets you quickly connect your iOS or Android devices using the

Epson iProjection app.

•Moderator Password lets you enter a password up to 4 numbers long for accessing the projector

as a moderator with the Epson iProjection (Windows/Mac) software or the Epson iProjection app.

(No default password.)

•Keyword Interrupt Display lets you select whether to display a projector keyword on the

projected image when accessing the projector using Epson iProjection.

Note: Use the displayed keyboard to enter the password and keyword. Press the arrow buttons on

the remote control to highlight characters and press Enter to select them.

16. When you finish selecting settings, select Return and press Enter to return the Network

Settings menu.

17. Select Set, and follow the on-screen instructions to save your settings and exit the menus.

Parent topic: Wired Network Projection

Wireless Network Projection

You can project over a wireless network. To do this, you must set up your projector and computer for

wireless projection.

To connect wirelessly to your projector, configure the connection using the projector's Network menus.

After connecting and setting up the projector, install the projector software. You may need to install it

from a software CD, if included, or download the software and manuals as necessary.

Note: If your projector is connected via a LAN cable to a network that includes a wireless access point,

you can connect to the projector wirelessly through the access point using the Epson network software.

Installing the Wireless LAN Module

Connecting Directly to a Smartphone or Tablet

Using Quick Wireless Connection (Windows)

Selecting Wireless Network Settings Manually

Selecting Wireless Network Settings in Windows

Selecting Wireless Network Settings on Mac

Setting Up Wireless Network Security

Parent topic: Using the Projector on a Network

Related references

Additional Projector Software and Manuals

Installing the Wireless LAN Module

To use the additional wireless connections, install the optional Epson 802.11b/g/n wireless module in the

projector. Do not install any other type of wireless module.

Caution: Never remove the module while its indicator light is blue or flashing, or while you are projecting

wirelessly. You may damage the module or lose data.

Note: The wireless LAN module is not included with your projector.

1. Turn off the projector and unplug the power cord.

2. Loosen the screws securing the cable cover and lift off the cable cover, if it is attached.

3. Insert the wireless LAN module into a USB-A port on the projector.

4. Replace the cable cover and tighten the cable cover screws.

5. Plug in and turn on the projector.

Parent topic: Wireless Network Projection

Related references

Optional Equipment and Replacement Parts

Connecting Directly to a Smartphone or Tablet

You can display a QR code on the screen and use it to connect a single smartphone or tablet to your

projector with the Epson iProjection app.

1. Download the latest version of the Epson iProjection app from the App Store or Google Play and

install it on your smartphone or tablet.

2. Press the Menu button on the projector or the remote control.

3. Select the Management menu and press Enter.

4. Select On as the Wireless LAN Power setting.

5. Select the Network menu and press Enter.

6. Select Network Settings and press Enter.

7. Make sure Simple AP is set to On.

8. Select Network Projection and press Enter.

9. Turn on the Projector Keyword setting if you want to prevent access to the projector by anyone not

in the room with it.

10. Select On as the Epson iProjection setting.

11. Select Return and press Enter to return to the Network Settings menu.

12. Select the following settings as necessary:

•SSID Display selects whether to display the SSID on the network standby screen and Home

screen.

•Display LAN Info lets you select how the projector displays network information. You can select

an option to display a QR code that lets you quickly connect your iOS or Android devices using the

Epson iProjection app.

•Moderator Password lets you enter a password up to 4 numbers long for accessing the projector

as a moderator with the Epson iProjection (Windows/Mac) software or the Epson iProjection app.

(No default password.)

•Keyword Interrupt Display lets you select whether to display a projector keyword on the

projected image when accessing the projector using Epson iProjection.

13. When you finish selecting settings, select Return and press Enter to return to the Network

Settings menu

14. Select Set, and follow the on-screen instructions to save your settings and exit the menus.

15. Press the LAN button on the remote control.

Your projector displays a QR code on the projection surface. You can press the Enter button to

hide and show the QR code on the screen. If you do not see the QR code, set the Display LAN Info

setting to Text & QR Code in the Network menu.

16. Open the Epson iProjection app on your smartphone or tablet.

17. Use the QR code reader feature to read the QR code and connect your device to the projector.

Note: The projector and the smartphone must be on the same wireless network in order to establish

a connection.

Your smartphone or tablet is now connected to your projector. Visit epson.com/iprojection (U.S.) or

epson.ca/iprojection (Canada) for information on controlling your projector with the Epson iProjection

app.

Parent topic: Wireless Network Projection

Using Quick Wireless Connection (Windows)

You can create a Quick Wireless Connection USB Key to quickly connect the projector to a Windows

computer wirelessly. Then you can project your presentation and remove the key when you are done.

Note: A USB flash drive is not included with your projector.

1. Create a Quick Wireless Connection USB Key with a USB flash drive and the Epson iProjection

(Windows) software.

Note: See the online Epson iProjection Operation Guide for instructions.

2. Make sure the wireless LAN module is installed in your projector.

3. Turn on the projector.

4. Press the LAN button on the remote control.

The LAN standby screen is displayed.

5. Verify the SSID and IP address.

6. Insert the USB key into the projector's USB-A1 port.

Note: If the control pad is connected to the projector, you can connect the USB key to the USB-A

port on the control pad instead.

You see a projected message that the network information update is complete.

7. Remove the USB key.

8. Insert the USB key into a USB port on your computer.

9. Follow the on-screen instructions to install the Epson iProjection software.

Note: If you see a Windows Firewall message, click Yes to disable the firewall. You need

administrator authority to install the software. If it is not installed automatically, double-click

MPPLaunch.exe in the USB key.

After a few minutes, your computer image is displayed by the projector. If it does not appear, press

the LAN or Source Search button on your remote control or restart your computer.

10. Run your presentation as necessary.

11. When you finish projecting wirelessly, select the Safely Remove Hardware option in the Windows

taskbar, then remove the USB key from your computer.

Note: You can share the USB key with other computers without disconnecting your computer. You

may need to restart your computer to reactivate your wireless LAN connection.

Parent topic: Wireless Network Projection

Related references

Additional Projector Software and Manuals

Selecting Wireless Network Settings Manually

Before you can project from your wireless network, you must select the network settings for the projector

using its menu system.

1. Turn on the projector.

2. Press the Menu button.

3. Select the Management menu and press Enter.

4. Select On as the Wireless LAN Power setting.

5. Select the Network menu and press Enter.

6. Select Network Settings and press Enter.

7. Select Projector Name and enter a name up to 16 alphanumeric characters long to identify the

projector on the network.

8. Set the Priority Control Interface setting to Wireless LAN.

9. Select the connection method:

• To connect directly to a wireless device (Simple AP mode), set the Simple AP setting to On and

go to step 16.

• To connect to a device via a wireless network router (infrastructure mode), set the Simple AP

setting to Off and go to the next step.

• If you installed the optional wireless LAN module and want to use both connection methods, set

the Simple AP setting to On and go to the next step.

10. Select the Wireless LAN menu and press Enter.

11. Select Search Access Point and press Enter.

The projector searches for wireless networks.

12. Select the network you want to connect to and enter the password, if necessary.

Note: If you need to assign the SSID manually, select SSID to enter the SSID.

13. Select IP Settings and press Enter.

14. Select your IP settings as necessary:

• If your network assigns addresses automatically, turn on the DHCP setting.

• If you must set addresses manually, turn off DHCP and enter the projector's IP Address,Subnet

Mask, and Gateway Address as needed.

Note: Do not use these addresses: 0.0.0.0, 127.x.x.x, 192.0.2.x or 224.0.0.0 through

255.255.255.255 (where x is a number from 0 to 255) for IP Address, 255.255.255.255 or 0.0.0.0

through 254.255.255.255 for Subnet Mask, and 0.0.0.0, 127.x.x.x or 224.0.0.0 through

255.255.255.255 for Gateway Address. For DNS Server addresses, do not use the following IP

addresses: 127.x.x.x (where x is a number from 0 to 255). When these settings are not set, DNS

server information is acquired using DHCP.

Note: To highlight the numbers you want from the displayed keyboard, press the arrow buttons on

the remote control. To select a highlighted number, press Enter.

15. To prevent display of the IP address on the network information screen, turn off IP Address

Display.

16. Select Return and press Enter to return to the Network Settings menu.

17. Select the Network Projection menu and press Enter.

18. Turn on the Projector Keyword setting if you want to prevent access to the projector by anyone not

in the room with it.

19. Set the Epson iProjection setting to On.

20. Select the following options as necessary:

•SSID Display lets you select whether to display the projector's SSID on the standby screen and

Home screen.

•Display LAN Info lets you select how the projector displays network information. You can select

an option to display a QR code that lets you quickly connect your iOS or Android devices with the

Epson iProjection app.

•Moderator Password lets you enter a password up to 4 numbers long for accessing the projector

as a moderator with the Epson iProjection (Windows/Mac) software or the Epson iProjection app.

•Keyword Interrupt Display lets you select whether to display a projector keyword on the

projected image when accessing the projector using Epson iProjection.

Note: Use the displayed keyboard to enter the password and keyword. Press the arrow buttons on

the remote control to highlight characters and press Enter to select them.

21. When you finish selecting settings, select Return to return to the Network Settings menu.

22. Select Set and follow the on-screen instructions to save your settings and exit the menus.

After you complete the wireless settings for your projector, you need to select the wireless network on

your computer, or iOS or Android device.

Note: You can press the LAN button on the remote control to check your network security settings after

completing the wireless settings.

Wireless LAN Menu Settings

Parent topic: Wireless Network Projection

Related references

Optional Equipment and Replacement Parts

Wireless LAN Menu Settings

Setting Options Description

Search Access Point To Search View Search for available wireless

network access points in

Advanced connection mode

Setting Options Description

SSID Up 32 alphanumeric characters Manually set the SSID (network

name) of the wireless LAN

system the projector is

connecting to

Security WPA2/WPA3-PSK

WPA2/WPA3-EAP

WPA3-PSK

WPA3-EAP

Open

Selects the type of security used

on the wireless network

WPA2/WPA3-PSK: uses

WPA2/WPA3 personal mode;

encryption is dependent on the

access point settings;

Passphrase must be the same

as the access point

WPA2/WPA3-EAP: uses

WPA2/WPA3 enterprise mode;

encryption is dependent on the

access point settings

WPA3-PSK: uses WPA3 security

with AES for encryption. Use the

Passphrase value to establish a

connection from a computer

WPA3-EAP: uses WPA3

enterprise mode; encryption is

dependent on the access point

settings

Passphrase Various passphrases from 8 to

32 characters (from a web

browser, the maximum is 63

characters)

Selects the pre-shared key used

on the network; passphrases are

case-sensitive. If the network

settings are reset after the

passphrase has been changed

more than once, the first

passphrase is restored. This

setting is only displayed when

Security is set to WPA3-PSK or

WPA2/WPA3-PSK.

Setting Options Description

EAP Method EAP Type

User name

Password

Client Certificate

Verify Server Certificate

CA certificate

RADIUS Server Name

Sets the EAP settings for WPA3-

EAP and WPA2/WPA3-EAP

security

IP Settings DHCP (On or Off)

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Gateway Address

Selects DHCP if your network

assigns IP addresses

automatically, or turns off DHCP

so you can enter the network's IP

address, subnet mask, and

gateway address as needed

DNS Server 1/DNS Server 2 Various IP addresses Sets the IP address for the DNS

server using 0 to 255 for each

address field. The DNS server

resolves the host name

IPv6 On

Off

Enables IPv6 to allow monitoring

and control of the projector over

a network using Epson Web

Control and PJLink

Auto Configuration On

Off

Selects whether to automatically

assign addresses according to

the Router Advertisement

Use Temporary Address On

Off

Enables use of a temporary IPv6

address

IP Address Display On

Off

Selects whether to display the IP

address on the network standby

screen and Home screen

Parent topic: Selecting Wireless Network Settings Manually

Selecting Wireless Network Settings in Windows

Before connecting to the projector, select the correct wireless network on your computer.

1. To access your wireless utility software, access the Desktop and double-click the network icon on

the Windows taskbar.

2. Do one of the following:

• If your projector is set up on an existing network (Advanced mode), select the network name

(SSID).

• If your projector is configured for Quick mode, select the projector's SSID.

3. Click Connect.

Parent topic: Wireless Network Projection

Selecting Wireless Network Settings on Mac

Before connecting to the projector, select the correct wireless network on your Mac.

1. Click the AirPort icon on the menu bar at the top of the screen.

2. Make sure AirPort is turned on, then do one of the following:

• If your projector is set up on an existing network (Advanced mode), select the network name

(SSID).

• If your projector is configured for Quick mode, select the projector's SSID.

Parent topic: Wireless Network Projection

Setting Up Wireless Network Security

You can set up security for your projector to use on a wireless network. Set up one of the following

security options to match the settings used on your network:

• WPA2-PSK (Simple AP mode only)

• WPA3-PSK

• WPA2/WPA3-PSK

• WPA3-EAP

• WPA2/WPA3-EAP

Note: To set up WPA3-EAP or WPA2/WPA3-EAP security, register your digital certificate file and place

it on a USB storage device for connection to your projector.

1. Press the Menu button.

2. Select the Network menu and press Enter.

3. Select Network Settings and press Enter.

4. Do one of the following:

• To connect directly to a wireless device (Simple AP mode), select Passphrase, press Enter,

and enter a passphrase from 8 to 63 characters long. When you are done, return to the Network

Settings screen, select Set, and follow the on-screen instructions to save your settings and exit

the menus. Skip the rest of these steps.

• To connect to a device via a wireless network router (infrastructure mode), select the Wireless

LAN menu and press Enter. Continue with the next step.

5. Select the Security setting and press Enter.

6. Select the security settings for your network.

7. Do one of the following according to the security you selected:

•WPA3-PSK or WPA2/WPA3-PSK: Select Passphrase, press Enter, and enter a passphrase

from 8 to 63 characters long. Then continue with step 9.

•WPA3-EAP or WPA2/WPA3-EAP: Select EAP Type and press Enter.

8. Select the protocol for authentication as the EAP Type setting.

9. When you are finished, select Return and press Enter to return to the Network Settings menu.

10. Select Set, and follow the on-screen instructions to save your settings and exit the menus.

Parent topic: Wireless Network Projection

Related topics

Registering a Digital Certificate on the Projector

Wireless Network Projection from a Mobile Device or Windows Computer

(Screen Mirroring)

You can send images to your projector from mobile devices such as laptops, smartphones, and tablets

using Miracast technology or from a Windows computer. If your device supports Miracast, you do not

need to install any additional software. When using a Windows computer, make sure the necessary

adapter for the Miracast connection is available.

You can connect two devices simultaneously using Miracast. The projector detects the input sources as

Screen Mirroring1 and Screen Mirroring2. Set Interrupt Connection to Off.

Screen Mirroring Restrictions

Selecting Screen Mirroring Settings

Connecting for Screen Mirroring with a Windows 8.x/Windows 10 Computer

Connecting for Screen Mirroring with Miracast

Parent topic: Using the Projector on a Network

Screen Mirroring Restrictions

Note the following when using Screen Mirroring features:

• You cannot project an interlaced image.

• You cannot play audio with more than 3 channels.

• You may not be able to project images depending on the resolution and frame rate.

• You cannot project 3D video.

• You can only play audio saved using the LPCM or AAC-LC audio codec.

• You can only play movies saved using the H.264 or H.265 movie codec (H.265 only supports the Main

Profile)

• You cannot use extended Miracast features on Windows 8.1.

• You may not be able to view contents with copyright protection using a Miracast connection.

• Do not change the projector's Screen Mirroring settings during Screen Mirroring projection. Doing so

may cause the projector to disconnect and delay reconnection.

• Do not turn off the electrical supply to the projector during Screen Mirroring projection.

Parent topic: Wireless Network Projection from a Mobile Device or Windows Computer (Screen

Mirroring)

Selecting Screen Mirroring Settings

You can select Screen Mirroring settings for your projector and then project images from your mobile

device.

1. Press the Menu button.

2. Select the Management menu and press Enter.

3. Set the Wireless LAN Power setting to On.

4. Select the Network menu and press Enter.

5. Select Network Settings and press Enter.

6. Select Priority Control Interface and press Enter.

7. Choose one of the following options:

• If you are casting images over a wired LAN, select Wired LAN.

• If you are casting images wirelessly directly or via a wireless network router, select Wireless LAN.

8. Set the Simple AP setting to On.

9. Select Network Projection and press Enter.

10. Set the Screen Mirroring setting to On.

11. Select these settings as necessary:

•Interrupt Connection lets you connect another mobile device while projecting using Screen

Mirroring or to exclusively connect to one device. If you want to use two Screen Mirroring sources,

turn this setting off.

•Adjust Image Quality lets you adjust the screen mirroring speed and quality. Select a small

number to improve the quality or a large number to increase the speed.

•Capture lets you capture the projected image and paste it on a page in Whiteboard mode.

Note: If you enable the Capture setting, the projector disables HDCP and H.265 codec features. If

you disabled the Capture setting, you can project HDCP content from the HDMI Out port.

•Screen Mirroring Info displays connection information when projecting from a Screen Mirroring

source.

12. When you finish selecting settings, select Return and press Enter to return to the Network

Settings screen.

13. Select Set, and follow the on-screen instructions to save your settings and exit the menus.

Parent topic: Wireless Network Projection from a Mobile Device or Windows Computer (Screen

Mirroring)

Connecting for Screen Mirroring with a Windows 8.x/Windows 10 Computer

You can set up your computer to wirelessly project images and play sound using Screen Mirroring.

Note: If you are using Windows 10, you can cast images over a local area network or from your device to

the projector directly. When you cast images over a local area network, the connection is more stable

and secure. Connect the projector to the network with an Ethernet cable or install the optional wireless

LAN module and set the wireless LAN settings to connect to a wireless network.

1. Select the Screen Mirroring settings on your projector as necessary.

2. Press the LAN button on the remote control to switch to the Screen Mirroring source.

You see the Screen Mirroring standby screen.

3. Do one of the following:

•Windows 10: Open Action Center and select Connect.

•Windows 8.x: Select Devices >Project >Add a wireless display.

4. Select your projector's Display Name from the list.

5. If you see the PIN entry screen on your computer, enter the PIN code displayed on the Screen

Mirroring standby screen or at the bottom right of the projected image.

The projector displays the image from your computer or mobile device.

Note: It may take some time to establish the connection. Do not disconnect the projector's power

cord while it is connecting to your device. This may cause your device to freeze or malfunction.

Parent topic: Wireless Network Projection from a Mobile Device or Windows Computer (Screen

Mirroring)

Related references

Optional Equipment and Replacement Parts

Network Settings - Network Menu

Related tasks

Selecting Screen Mirroring Settings

Connecting for Screen Mirroring with Miracast

If your mobile device supports Miracast, you can connect it to the projector wirelessly and project images

and sound.

1. Select the Screen Mirroring settings on your projector as necessary.

2. Press the LAN button on the remote control to switch to the Screen Mirroring source.

You see the Screen Mirroring standby screen.

3. On your mobile device, use the Miracast function to search for the projector.

Note: See your mobile device's documentation for information on accessing the Miracast function.

You see a list of available devices.

4. Select your projector from the list.

5. If you see the PIN entry screen on your mobile device, enter the PIN code displayed on the Screen

Mirroring standby screen or at the bottom right of the projected image.

The projector displays the image from your mobile device.

Caution: It may take some time to establish the connection. Do not disconnect the projector's power

cord while it is connecting to your device. Doing so may cause your device to freeze or malfunction.

Note: Depending on the mobile device, you may need to delete a device when connecting. Follow

the on-screen instructions on your device.

Parent topic: Wireless Network Projection from a Mobile Device or Windows Computer (Screen

Mirroring)

Related references

Network Settings - Network Menu

Related tasks

Selecting Screen Mirroring Settings

Setting Up Projector Network E-Mail Alerts

You can set up the projector to send you an e-mail alert over the network if there is a problem with the

projector.

Note: If the Standby Mode setting is set to Communication On in the Operation menu, you can

receive e-mail alerts even if the projector is in standby mode (the power is off). The Standby Mode

setting is displayed only if the A/V Output setting in the Signal I/O menu is set to While Projecting.

1. Press the Menu button.

2. Select the Network menu and press Enter.

3. Select Network Settings and press Enter.

4. Select the Mail Notification menu and press Enter.

5. Turn on Mail Notification.

6. Enter the IP address for the SMTP Server setting.

Note: Do not use 127.x.x.x (where x is a number from 0 to 255).

7. Select a type of Authentication for the SMTP server.

8. Select a number for the SMTP server Port Number setting, from 0 to 65535 (default is 25).

9. Enter a User Name for the SMTP server.

10. Enter a Password for the SMTP server authentication.

11. Enter the sender's email address as the From setting.

12. Choose an Address field, enter the e-mail address, and select the alerts you want to receive there.

Repeat for up to three addresses. Your e-mail address can be up to 64 alphanumeric characters

long.

13. If you are using the PJLink protocol for projector control, turn on the PJLink setting in the Projector

Control menu and enter the IP address where you want to receive PJLink notifications as the

Notified IP Address setting.

14. When you finish selecting settings, select Return and press Enter to return to the Network

Settings menu.

15. Select Set, and follow the on-screen instructions to save your settings and exit the menus.

Note: If a critical problem causes a projector to shut down, you may not receive an e-mail alert.

Network Projector E-mail Alert Messages

Parent topic: Using the Projector on a Network

Network Projector E-mail Alert Messages

When a problem occurs with a networked projector, and you selected to receive e-mail alerts, you

receive an e-mail containing the following information:

• The email address entered as the From setting

•Epson Projector on the subject line

• The name of the projector experiencing a problem

• The IP address of the affected projector

• Detailed information about the problem

Note: If a critical problem causes a projector to shut down, you may not receive an e-mail alert.

Parent topic: Setting Up Projector Network E-Mail Alerts

Setting Up Monitoring Using SNMP

Network administrators can install SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) software on network

computers so they can monitor projectors. If your network uses this software, you can set up the

projector for SNMP monitoring.

1. Press the Menu button.

2. Select Network >Network Settings >Projector Control >SNMP >On.

3. Enter up to two IP addresses to receive SNMP notifications as the Trap IP Address setting, using 0

to 255 for each address field.

Note: To enter the IP address using the numeric keys on the remote control, press and hold the

Num button. Do not use these addresses: 224.0.0.0 through 255.255.255.255. This projector

supports SNMP agent version 1 (SNMPv1).

4. Enter the SNMP Community Name (up to 32 alphanumeric characters).

5. When you finish selecting settings, select Return and press Enter to return to the Network

Settings menu.

6. Select Set, and follow the on-screen instructions to save your settings and exit the menus.

Parent topic: Using the Projector on a Network

Controlling a Networked Projector Using a Web Browser

Once you have connected your projector to your network, you can select projector settings and control

projection using a compatible web browser. This lets you access the projector remotely.

Note: The web setup and control features support Microsoft Internet Explorer 11.0 or later, Microsoft

Edge, Google Chrome, and Safari on networks that do not use a proxy server for connection. You can

also control the projector using a web browser through the Epson iProjection app. You cannot select all

of the projector menu settings or control all projector functions using a web browser.

Note: If you set Standby Mode to Communication On in the Operation menu, you can use a web

browser to select settings and control projection even if the projector is in standby mode (the power is

off). The Standby Mode setting is displayed only if the A/V Output setting in the Signal I/O menu is set

to While Projecting.

1. Make sure the projector is turned on.

2. Start your web browser on a computer or device connected to the network.

3. Type the projector's IP address into the browser's address box and press the computer's Enter key

(if you are entering an IPv6 address, wrap the address with [ and ]).

Note: You can find the projector's IP address in the projector's Network menu or on the LAN input

screen.

Note: If you attempt to connect to the Web Control screen via a proxy server, the screen will not be

displayed. Make a direct connection to the Web Control screen.

You see the Web Control screen.

4. To control projection remotely, select the Basic Control option from the Web Control screen.

Note: If you see a log in window, enter your user name and password. (The default user name is

EPSONREMOTE and the default password is guest. You can change the password in the

projector's Network menu.)

You see a screen like this:

1 Returns to the Epson Web Control screen

2 Power button control

3 Selects the input source

4A/V Mute button control

5Freeze button control

6 Displays closed captions

7 Displays a QR code for connecting with iOS or Android devices using the Epson iProjection

app

8Volume button controls

9 Searches for connected sources

5. Select the icon corresponding to the projector function you want to control.

6. To select projector menu settings, select Advanced on the Web Control screen.

Note: If you see a log in window, enter your user name and password. (The default user name is

EPSONWEB and the default password is admin. You can change the password in the projector's

Network menu.)

7. Select the name of the menu and follow the on-screen instructions.

Parent topic: Using the Projector on a Network

Creating an Address Book

When sending e-mails from whiteboard mode, you can choose e-mail addresses from an address book.

You can create the address book by loading a text file of up to 999 addresses through the web control

page.

Note: Addresses are displayed in the order they appear in the text file.

1. Create the text file containing the list of addresses you want to add to the address book. The file

must have the following characteristics:

• Tab-delimited

• Each line must contain a pair of strings separated by a tab: <name> <tab> <email_address>

• Each line can contain up to 256 characters

• Filename with a .txt extension

• Character code must be Unicode (UTF-16 with BOM)

The text file should look something like this:

2. Make sure the projector is turned on.

3. Start your web browser on a computer connected to the network.

4. Type the projector's IP address into the browser's address box and press the computer's Enter key

(if you are entering an IPv6 address, wrap the address with [ and ]).

Note: You can find the projector's IP address in the projector's Network menu or on the LAN input

screen.

5. Enter the user name and password at the prompts.

6. Select Advanced.

Note: If you attempt to connect to the Web Control screen via a proxy server, the screen will not be

displayed. Make a direct connection to the Web Control screen.

You see the Web Control screen.

7. Select Interactive >Mail >Address Book File and browse for the address book file.

8. Select the address book file and select Send.

The address book file is uploaded to the projector.

Note: If you need to delete the address book, select Interactive >Mail >Address Book Settings >

Delete Address Book and select Execute.

Parent topic: Using the Projector on a Network

Using Crestron Connected

If you are using the Crestron Connected network monitoring and control system, you can set up your

projector for use on the system. Crestron Connected lets you control and monitor your projector using a

web browser.

Note: You cannot use the Message Broadcasting feature in the Epson Projector Management software

when you use Crestron Connected.

For additional information on Crestron Connected, contact Crestron.

Setting Up Crestron Connected

Controlling a Networked Projector Using Crestron Connected

Parent topic: Using the Projector on a Network

Setting Up Crestron Connected

To set up your projector for monitoring and control using a Crestron Connected system, make sure your

computer and projector are connected to the network.

Note: If you want to use the Crestron Connected system when the projector is turned off, you need to

adjust the Standby Mode setting in the Operation menu. The Standby Mode setting is displayed only if

the A/V Output setting in the Signal I/O menu is set to While Projecting, the Auto Power On setting in

the Network menu is set to Off, and the Power On Trigger setting in the Operation menu is set to Plug-in

Detection.

1. Press the Menu button.

2. Select the Network menu and press Enter.

3. Select Network Settings and press Enter.

4. Select the Projector Control menu and press Enter.

5. Set the Crestron Connected setting to On to allow the projector to be detected.

Note: Enabling Crestron Connected disables the Message Broadcasting feature in the Epson

Projector Management software.

6. When you are finished selecting settings, select Return and press Enter to return to the Network

Settings menu.

7. Select Set, and follow the on-screen instructions to save your settings and exit the menus.

8. Turn off the projector, then turn it on again to enable the setting.

9. Start your Web browser on a computer or device connected to the network.

10. Go to the Epson Web Control screen by entering the projector's IP address into the browser's

address box.

11. Select the Crestron Connected settings. See the Crestron Web site for details.

Parent topic: Using Crestron Connected

Related references

Input Signal Settings - Signal I/O Menu

Network Settings - Network Menu

Feature Settings - Operation Menu

Controlling a Networked Projector Using Crestron Connected

Once you have set up your projector to use Crestron Connected, you can control and monitor projection

using a compatible web browser.

1. Start your web browser on a computer connected to the network.

2. Type the projector's IP address into the browser's address box and press the computer's Enter key.

You see the Epson Web Control screen:

Note: You may need to log in to access some of the options on the Web Control screen. If you see a

3. Select Crestron Connected.

You see a screen like this:

Note: Sources in the image above vary depending on ports available on your product.

4. Select the input source that you want to control in the Sources List box. You can scroll through

available sources using the up and down arrows in the box.

5. To control projection remotely, click the on-screen buttons that correspond to the projector's remote

control buttons. You can scroll through button options at the bottom of the screen.

Note: These on-screen buttons do not directly correspond to the projector's remote control buttons:

•OK acts as the Enter button

•Menu displays the projector's menu

6. To view information about the projector, click the Info tab.

7. To change projector, Crestron, and password settings, click the Tools tab, select settings on the

displayed screen, and click Send.

8. When you finish selecting settings, click Exit to exit the program.

Parent topic: Using Crestron Connected

100

Registering a Digital Certificate on the Projector

Follow the instructions here if you need to install a digital certificate on the projector to provide security

for your presentation files.

Note: You can register a digital certificate over a network. However, be sure to register just once or the

certificate may not install correctly.

Importing a Web Server Certificate Using the Projector Menus

Registering Digital Certificates from a Web Browser

Digital Certificate Types

Parent topic: Using the Projector on a Network

Importing a Web Server Certificate Using the Projector Menus

You can create your web server certificate and import it using the projector menus and a USB flash

drive.

Note: You can also register digital certificates from your web browser. Make sure to only register once,

or the certificate may not install correctly.

1. Make sure your digital certificate file is compatible with projector registration and saved in the root

directory of the USB flash drive.

2. Press the Menu button on the projector or remote control.

3. Select Network >Network Settings >Projector Control >Secure HTTP >On.

4. Select the Web Server Certificate setting and press Enter.

5. Select Save and press Enter.

6. Follow the on-screen instructions to connect a USB flash drive to the USB-A port on the projector or

control pad (BrightLink 1485Fi).

7. Press Enter to display the certificate list.

8. Select the certificate you want to import from the displayed list.

A message is displayed prompting you to enter the password for the certificate.

9. Enter the password and press Enter.

The certificate is imported and a completion message appears.

Parent topic: Registering a Digital Certificate on the Projector

101

Registering Digital Certificates from a Web Browser

You can register the digital certificates on the projector for wireless LAN authentication.

Note: You can also register the digital certificates in the projector's Network menu. However, be sure to

1. Make sure your digital certificate file is compatible with projector registration.

2. Make sure the projector is turned on.

3. Start your web browser on a computer or mobile device connected to the network.

4. Type the projector's IP address into the browser's address box and press the computer's Enter key.

You see the Web Control screen and a prompt to enter a user ID and password.

5. Select Advanced and enter the following information in uppercase or lowercase letters, exactly as

shown:

• For the user ID, enter EPSONWEB. (You cannot change the user ID.)

• For the password, enter the default password admin. (You can change the Web Control password

using the projector's Network Settings menu.)

6. Under Network, select Certificate.

Note: You may need to select the menu icon to find Network, depending on your device.

102

You see a screen like this:

7. Click the Choose File button, select the certificate file, and click Open.

Note: The button name may vary depending on the browser you are using.

8. Enter a password in the Password box and click Send.

9. When you finish registering the certificate, click Apply to finalize your changes and complete the

registration.

Parent topic: Registering a Digital Certificate on the Projector

Digital Certificate Types

You can register these types of digital certificates.

Client Certificate (PEAP-TLS/EAP-TLS)

Specification Description

Format PKCS#12

Extension PFX, P12

Encryption RSA

103

Specification Description

Hashes MD5/SHA-1/SHA-256/SHA-384/SHA-512

Key length 512/1024/2048/4096 bit

Password Up to 64 alphanumeric characters; required

CA Certificate (PEAP/PEAP-TLS/EAP-TLS/EAP-FAST)

Specification Description

Format X509v3

Extension DER/CER/PEM

Encryption RSA

Hashes MD5/SHA-1/SHA-256/SHA-384/SHA-512

Key length 512/1024/2048/4096 bit

Encoding BASE64/Binary

Web Server Certificate (Secure HTTP)

Specification Description

Format PKCS#12

Extension PFX, P12

Encryption RSA

Hashes MD5/SHA-1/SHA-256/SHA-384/SHA-512

Key length 512/1024/2048/4096 bit

Common name Network host name

Organization Optional

Password Up to 64 alphanumeric characters; required

Parent topic: Registering a Digital Certificate on the Projector

104

Using Basic Projector Features

Follow the instructions in these sections to use your projector's basic features.

Turning On the Projector

Turning Off the Projector

Selecting the Language for the Projector Menus

Setting the Date and Time

Image Shape

Resizing the Image with the Wide and Tele Buttons

Adjusting the Image Position

Focusing the Image

Remote Control Operation

Selecting an Image Source

Projection Modes

Image Aspect Ratio

Color Mode

Adjusting the Hue, Saturation, and Brightness

Adjusting Gamma

Adjusting the Image Resolution

Adjusting the Projector's Brightness Level

Turning On Dynamic Contrast

Controlling the Volume with the Volume Buttons

Inverting the Audio Channels

Selecting a Quick Startup Setting

Projecting a PC Free Presentation

Turning On the Projector

Turn on the projector before you turn on the computer or video equipment you want to use.

105

1. Connect the power cord to the projector's power inlet.

2. Plug the power cord into an electrical outlet.

The projector's power light turns blue. This indicates that the projector is receiving power.

Note: With Direct Power On turned on, the projector turns on as soon as you plug it in. If you enable

the Auto Power On setting in the projector's Operation menu, the projector turns on when it detects

a signal or cable connection from the selected port.

3. Press the power button on the projector, control pad (BrightLink 1485Fi), or remote control to turn on

the projector.

The projector beeps and the Status light flashes blue as the projector warms up. After about 30

seconds, the Status light stops flashing and turns blue.

Note: When Quick Startup is enabled in the projector's Operation menu, the projector becomes

ready for use in several seconds the next time you press the power button.

106

Warning: Never look into the projector lens when the laser is on. This can damage your eyes and is

especially dangerous for children and pets. If you are using the remote control to turn the projector

on, make sure no one is looking into the lens or in front of the projector before turning it on.

Caution: Make sure no objects are blocking the light from the projector lens. Objects blocking the

lens for an extended time can melt and light that is reflected back into the lens can cause the

projector to malfunction.

If you do not see a projected image right away, try the following:

• Turn on the connected computer or video device.

• Insert a DVD or other video media and press the play button, if necessary.

• Press the Source Search button on the projector or remote control to detect the video source.

Note: If the Auto Source Search setting in the Operation menu is enabled, the projector

automatically detects the input signal when you turn it on.

• Change the screen output from the computer when using a laptop.

• Press the button for the video source on the remote control.

• If the Home screen is displayed, select the source you want to project.

Using the Home Screen

Parent topic: Using Basic Projector Features

Related references

Feature Settings - Operation Menu

Using the Home Screen

You can select input sources and other frequently used options from the Home screen.

Note: A Touch Unit is optional for the BrightLink 1480Fi and must be installed to enable finger touch

operation.

1. To display the Home screen, do one of the following:

• Press the Home button on the control panel or remote control.

• Turn on the projector with the Home Screen Auto Disp setting enabled.

• Turn on the projector when no signal is received from the selected input source.

107

2. Press the arrow buttons on the remote control or control panel to navigate the screen, and press

Enter to select an option. You can also select menu items using the interactive pen or your finger.

1 Selects the source you want to project

A checkmark appears in the upper right corner of the current input source. For most sources,

a preview of the input image appears as a thumbnail.

2 Turns off the projector

3 Closes the Home screen

4 Starts Whiteboard mode

5 Projects images from two or four input sources simultaneously in a grid format

6 Shares your projected image with other projectors connected to the same network

7 Displays the Connection Guide

You can view steps for different wireless connection methods depending on the devices you

are using, such as smartphones or computers.

108

8 Lets you select the following common projector settings (these settings may vary depending

on other selected settings):

•Color Mode

•Brightness Level

•Volume

•Geometry Correction (H/V-Keystone and Quick Corner are available)

•Auto Calibration

•Aspect

9 Moves to the previous or next page if there are more available input sources

10 Displays the projector name and the projector keyword

11 Displays the current time

Note: The Home screen closes after 10 minutes of inactivity.

3. Press the icon to close the Home screen.

Parent topic: Turning On the Projector

Turning Off the Projector

Before turning off the projector, shut down any computer connected to it so you can see the computer

display during shutdown.

Note: Turn off this product when not in use to prolong the life of the projector. Laser life will vary

depending upon mode selected, environmental conditions, and usage. Brightness decreases over time.

1. Press the power button on the projector, control pad, or remote control.

The projector displays a shutdown confirmation screen.

109

2. Press the power button again. (To leave it on, press any other button.)

The projector beeps twice, the laser turns off, and the Status light turns off.

Note: If the Light Source Calibration setting is set to Run Periodically in the projector's

Management menu, light source calibration starts automatically if you turn off the projector and the

following conditions are present:

• 100 hours have passed since the last light source calibration.

• You have used the projector continuously for at least 20 minutes.

3. To transport or store the projector, make sure the power light is blue (not flashing) and the Status

light is off, then unplug the power cord.

Caution: To avoid damaging the projector or laser, never unplug the power cord when the Status

light is on or flashing.

Parent topic: Using Basic Projector Features

Related references

Administration Settings - Management Menu

110

Selecting the Language for the Projector Menus

If you want to view the projector's menus and messages in another language, you can change the

Language setting.

1. Turn on the projector.

2. Press the Menu button.

3. Select the Management menu and press Enter.

4. Select the Language setting and press Enter.

5. Select the language you want to use and press Enter.

6. Press Menu or Esc to exit the menus.

Parent topic: Using Basic Projector Features

Setting the Date and Time

You can set the date and time for the projector.

1. Press the Menu button.

111

2. Select the Management menu and press Enter.

3. Select the Date & Time setting and press Enter.

You see a screen like this:

4. Select the Date & Time setting and press Enter.

5. Select Date, press Enter, and use the displayed keyboard to enter today's date.

6. Select Time, press Enter, and use the displayed keyboard to enter the current time.

7. Adjust the Time Difference (UTC) settings to set the time difference from the Coordinated Universal

Time.

8. When you are finished, select Set and press Enter.

9. To activate daylight saving time, select the Daylight Saving Time setting and set it to On. Then

select settings.

10. When you are finished, select Set and press Enter.

11. To update the time automatically through an internet time server, select the Internet Time setting

and set it to On.

12. Select Internet Time and press Enter.

13. Enter the IP address for the Internet time server you want to use and select OK.

14. Select Set and press Enter.

15. Press Menu or Esc to exit the menus.

Parent topic: Using Basic Projector Features

112

Image Shape

You can project an evenly rectangular image by placing the projector directly in front of the center of the

screen and keeping it level. If you place the projector at an angle to the screen, or tilted up or down, or off

to the side, you may need to correct the image shape for the best display quality. After correction, your

image is slightly smaller.

For the best quality images, try to adjust the projector's position to achieve the correct image size and

shape. After you have corrected the position of the projector, you can use the adjustments in this section

to correct the image shape. You cannot correct an image shape using multiple correction methods at the

same time.

Note: For interactive use, the image must be evenly rectangular, without distortion. Refer to the online

Installation Guide for instructions on positioning the projector to achieve an evenly rectangular image.

After performing any Geometry Correction, you need to calibrate the system again.

Correcting Image Shape with the Keystone Buttons

Correcting Image Shape with Quick Corner

Correcting Image Shape with Arc Correction

Correcting Image Shape with Point Correction

Correcting Image Shape with Corner Markers

Applying Saved Image Shape Settings

Parent topic: Using Basic Projector Features

Correcting Image Shape with the Keystone Buttons

You can use the projector's keystone correction buttons to correct the shape of an image that is

unevenly rectangular on the sides.

Note: You can use the keystone buttons to correct the image up to ± 3° horizontally or vertically. If the

projector is mounted on the wall, use the adjustment dials on the wall mount to correct the screen image

before using any other digital correction methods.

Note: If you change the Screen Type setting or adjust the image position, your image adjustments are

reset.

113

1. Turn on the projector and display an image.

2. Press one of these keystone buttons on the control panel to display the Keystone adjustment

screen.

114

3. Press a keystone button on the projector's control panel to adjust the image shape.

Note: The horizontal keystone adjustment buttons are labeled Wand T.

After correction, your image is slightly smaller.

Note: To save the current image shape, select Save Memory. You can save up to three image

shapes in the projector's memory.

Note: If the projector is installed out of reach, you can also correct the image shape with the remote

control using the H/V-Keystone settings in the projector menus.

115

Parent topic: Image Shape

Correcting Image Shape with Quick Corner

You can use the projector's Quick Corner setting to correct the shape and size of an image that is

unevenly rectangular on all sides.

Note: If you change the Screen Type setting or adjust the image position, your image adjustments are

reset.

1. Turn on the projector and display an image.

2. Press the Menu button.

116

3. Select the Installation menu and press Enter.

4. Select the Geometry Correction setting and press Enter.

5. Select the Quick Corner setting and press Enter.

Note: You may see a confirmation screen. Select Yes and press Enter again.

117

You see the Quick Corner adjustment screen:

6. Use the arrow buttons on the projector or remote control to select the corner of the image you want

to adjust. Then press Enter.

Note: To reset your adjustments, press and hold the Esc button for at least 2 seconds to display a

reset screen. Then select Yes.

118

7. Press the arrow buttons to adjust the image shape as necessary. Press Enter to return to the area

selection screen.

Note: You can also use the numeric buttons on the remote control to adjust the image shape. If one

of the directional arrows on the screen turns gray, you cannot adjust the shape any further in that

direction.

8. When you are finished, press Esc.

The Geometry Correction setting is now set to Quick Corner in the projector's Installation menu. If you

press the keystone adjustment buttons on the control panel, the area selection screen appears.

Note: To save the current image shape, select Save Memory. You can save up to three image shapes

in the projector's memory.

Parent topic: Image Shape

Correcting Image Shape with Arc Correction

You can use the projector's Arc Correction setting to adjust the curve or arc of the sides of your image.

Note: If you change the Screen Type setting or adjust the image position, your image adjustments are

reset.

119

1. Turn on the projector and display an image.

2. Press the Menu button.

3. Select the Installation menu and press Enter.

4. Select the Geometry Correction setting and press Enter.

5. Select the Arc Correction setting and press Enter. Then select the Arc Correction setting and

press Enter again.

120

You see the Arc Correction adjustment screen:

Note: To reset your adjustments, press the Esc button for at least 2 seconds to display a reset

screen, and select Yes.

6. Use the arrow buttons on the projector or the remote control to select the corner or side of the image

you want to adjust. Then press Enter.

7. Press the arrow buttons to adjust the image shape as necessary.

121

8. When you are finished, press Esc.

Note: To save the current image shape, select Memory >Save Memory. You can save up to three

image shapes in the projector's memory.

Parent topic: Image Shape

Related references

The Whiteboard Toolbar

Correcting Image Shape with Point Correction

You can use the projector's Point Correction feature to fine-tune the image shape using points on a grid.

This is useful for adjusting overlapping areas in multiple projected images that do not line up correctly.

1. Turn on the projector and display an image.

2. Press the Menu button.

3. Select Installation >Geometry Correction >Point Correction.

Note: If you see a confirmation message, select Yes and press Enter.

4. Select the Point Correction setting again and press Enter.

5. Select the number of grid lines to display and press Enter.

You see a grid on the projected image.

Note: If you need to change the color of the grid lines, press Esc, select the Pattern Color setting,

and select a suitable color.

122

6. Press the arrow buttons on the projector or remote control to move to the point on the grid that you

want to adjust. Then press Enter.

7. Press the arrow buttons as necessary to correct the image shape.

8. Press Esc to return to the previous screen and select another point to correct, if necessary.

9. When you are finished, press the Menu button.

Note: If necessary, you can fine-tune your image adjustments using the Quick Corner setting.

Parent topic: Image Shape

Related tasks

Correcting Image Shape with Quick Corner

123

Correcting Image Shape with Corner Markers

If you have installed corner markers on the projection surface, you can use the projector's Auto Screen

Adjustment setting to correct the image shape automatically.

Note: The projected image needs to be 110 inches (279.4 cm) or less diagonally to use the Auto Screen

Adjustment. Make sure the projector is squarely facing the projection surface. Auto Screen Adjustment

may not work if your image surface:

• Is not flat.

• Is patterned.

• Is dirty.

• Has obstructions or objects on the image surface.

Note: The projector includes 4 magnets and 4 stickers for Auto Screen Adjustment. If your projection

surface is magnetic, attach the stickers to the magnets. If you projection surface isn't magnetic, attach

the stickers directly to the projection surface. If you attach the stickers directly to the surface, they can

only be used once.

Note: Before performing Auto Screen Adjustment, set the screen type setting. The adjustments reset

when you change the Screen Type. You may not be able to correct the image shape correctly when you

shift the image.

1. Press the Menu button.

124

2. Select the Installation menu and press Enter.

3. Select the Auto Screen Adjustment setting and press Enter.

You see a guide screen.

4. Follow the on-screen instructions to adjust the position of the projected image so that the corner

markers appear just inside the yellow area.

5. Press Enter.

A guide pattern appears and the projector starts adjusting the image shape.

Note: If necessary, you can fine-tune your image adjustments using the Quick Corner setting.

Parent topic: Image Shape

Related tasks

Correcting Image Shape with Quick Corner

125

Applying Saved Image Shape Settings

You can load the image shape settings you selected and saved to the projector's memory and apply

them to the current image.

1. Turn on the projector and display an image.

2. Hold down the Num button on the remote control and press the number button (1, 2, or 3) that

matches the number of the saved image shape setting.

The saved image shape setting is applied and you are prompted to calibrate the screen.

3. Follow the on-screen instructions to calibrate the screen.

Parent topic: Image Shape

Resizing the Image with the Wide and Tele Buttons

You can resize the image using the Wide and Tele buttons. Wait at least 30 minutes after you start

projecting to adjust the image size.

1. Turn on the projector and display an image.

2. To enlarge the image size, press the W(Wide) button on the projector's control panel.

126

3. To reduce the image size, press the T(Tele) button.

After you adjust the image size, the Image Shift screen is displayed automatically for adjusting the

image position.

Note: If the projector is installed out of reach, you can also adjust the image size with the remote

control using the Digital Zoom setting in the projector menus.

Parent topic: Using Basic Projector Features

Related references

Installation Settings - Installation Menu

Adjusting the Image Position

You can use the Image Shift feature to adjust the image position without moving the projector. Wait at

least 30 minutes after you start projecting to adjust the image position.

Note: This feature is not available if the Zoom option is set to the widest setting.

127

1. Turn on the projector and display an image.

2. Adjust the image size using the W(Wide) and T(Tele) buttons.

After you adjust the image size, the Image Shift screen is displayed automatically.

3. Use the arrow buttons on the projector or remote control to adjust the image position.

Note: You can also use the Installation menu to adjust the Image Shift setting.

4. Press Esc to close the Image Shift screen. The screen closes if no operation is performed for

approximately 10 seconds.

Note: The Image Shift setting is retained even if the projector is turned off; however, you need to

readjust the image position if you change the projector's location or angle.

Parent topic: Using Basic Projector Features

Related references

Installation Settings - Installation Menu

128

Focusing the Image

Wait at least 30 minutes after you start projecting to adjust the focus.

1. Turn on the projector and display an image.

2. Press the Menu button.

3. Select the Installation menu and press Enter.

129

4. Select Test Pattern and press Enter.

5. Open the front cover.

130

6. Move the focus lever and adjust the focus using the center reference point of the projected screen.

Note: You may see a different test pattern than the one shown above.

131

7. Once the center reference point is in focus, check that the corner reference points are also in focus.

Note: If any areas are out of focus, use the focus lever to adjust the focus until the corners appear

the same.

8. To remove the test pattern, press Esc.

Parent topic: Using Basic Projector Features

Remote Control Operation

The remote control lets you control the projector from almost anywhere in the room, up to 19.7 feet (6 m)

away. You can point it at the screen or board, or the front or back of the projector.

132

Make sure that you aim the remote control at the projector's receivers within the angles listed here.

1 19.7 feet (6 m)

2 ± 30°

3 ± 55°

4 60°

5 15°

Note: Avoid using the remote control in conditions with bright fluorescent lights or in direct sunlight, or

the projector may not respond to commands. If you will not use the remote control for a long time,

remove the batteries.

Parent topic: Using Basic Projector Features

Selecting an Image Source

If you connected multiple image sources to the projector, such as a computer and DVD player, you may

want to switch from one image source to the other.

133

Note: If you turned on the Auto Source Search setting in the Operation menu, the projector

automatically switches to another detected image source if the signal to the current image source is lost.

1. Make sure the connected image source you want to use is turned on.

2. For video image sources, insert a DVD or other video media and press its play button, if necessary.

3. Do one of the following:

• Press the Source Search button on the projector or remote control until you see the image from

the source you want.

• Press the button for the source you want on the remote control. If there is more than one port for

that source, press the button again to cycle through the sources.

1 HDMI, Video, and HDBaseT (BrightLink 1485Fi) sources

2 VGA port sources

3 USB port sources (computer display or external devices)

4 Network and Screen Mirroring sources

134

• Press the button for the HDMI source you want on the control pad (BrightLink 1485Fi).

• Press the Home button on the remote control or projector and select your image source.

Note: Your Home screen may look different from the illustration shown here. A checkmark

appears on the image from the current input source. You can see thumbnail previews of most

input sources.

135

The displayed order of the input sources changes. Detected input sources appear in the upper left

position. You can set the order of the input sources using the Sort Source Thumbnails setting in the

projector's Display menu.

Parent topic: Using Basic Projector Features

Related references

Feature Settings - Operation Menu

Related tasks

Using the Home Screen

Projection Modes

Depending on how you positioned the projector, you may need to change the projection mode so your

images project correctly.

•Front lets you project from a table in front of the screen.

•Front/Upside Down flips the image over top-to-bottom to project upside-down from a wall or ceiling

mount.

•Rear flips the image horizontally to project from behind a translucent screen.

•Rear/Upside Down flips the image over top-to-bottom and horizontally to project from the wall or

ceiling and behind a translucent screen.

You can change the projection mode using the remote control or by changing the Projection setting in

the Installation menu.

Changing the Projection Mode Using the Remote Control

Changing the Projection Mode Using the Menus

Parent topic: Using Basic Projector Features

Changing the Projection Mode Using the Remote Control

You can change the projection mode to flip the image over top-to-bottom.

1. Turn on the projector and display an image.

136

2. Hold down the A/V Mute button on the remote control for 5 to 10 seconds.

The image disappears briefly and reappears flipped top-to-bottom.

3. To change projection back to the original mode, hold down the A/V Mute button for 5 to 10 seconds

again.

Parent topic: Projection Modes

Changing the Projection Mode Using the Menus

You can change the projection mode to flip the image over top-to-bottom and/or left-to-right using the

projector menus.

1. Turn on the projector and display an image.

2. Press the Menu button.

137

3. Select the Installation menu and press Enter.

4. Select the Projection setting and press Enter.

5. Select a projection mode and press Enter.

6. Press Menu or Esc to exit the menus.

Parent topic: Projection Modes

Image Aspect Ratio

The projector can display images in different width-to-height ratios called aspect ratios. Normally the

input signal from your video source determines the image's aspect ratio. However, for certain images

you can change the aspect ratio to fit your screen by pressing a button on the remote control.

If you always want to use a particular aspect ratio for a certain video input source, you can select it using

the projector's menus.

Changing the Image Aspect Ratio

Available Image Aspect Ratios

Parent topic: Using Basic Projector Features

138

Changing the Image Aspect Ratio

You can change the aspect ratio of the displayed image to resize it.

Note: Set the Screen Type setting in the projector's Installation menu before changing the aspect ratio.

Note: This setting is available only when the Scale setting is turned off or the Scale Mode setting is set

to Full Display (BrightLink 1485Fi).

1. Turn on the projector and switch to the image source you want to use.

2. Press the Aspect button on the remote control.

The shape and size of the displayed image changes, and the name of the aspect ratio appears

briefly on the screen.

3. To cycle through the available aspect ratios for your input signal, press the Aspect button

repeatedly.

Note: To remove black bars when projecting from a computer, set the Resolution setting to Wide or

Normal in the Image menu, depending on your computer's resolution.

Parent topic: Image Aspect Ratio

Related references

Image Quality Settings - Image Menu

Available Image Aspect Ratios

You can select the following image aspect ratios, depending on the selected Screen Type setting and

input signal from your image source.

139

Note: Black bands and cropped images may project in certain aspect ratios, depending on the aspect

ratio and resolution of your input signal.

Aspect ratio setting Description

Auto Automatically sets the aspect ratio according to the input signal and

the Resolution setting.

Full Displays images using the full width of the projection area, but does

not maintain the aspect ratio.

Zoom Displays images using the full width of the projection area and

maintains the aspect ratio of the image.

Native Displays images as is (aspect ratio and resolution are maintained).

Note: The appearance of the Native image aspect ratio setting varies depending on the input signal.

If there are margins between the image edges and the screen, you can adjust the position of the

projected image using the Screen Position setting in the Installation menu.

Parent topic: Image Aspect Ratio

Color Mode

The projector offers different Color Modes to provide optimum brightness, contrast, and color for a

variety of viewing environments and image types. You can select a mode designed to match your image

and environment, or experiment with the available modes.

If you always want to use a particular color mode for a certain video input source, you can select it using

the projector menus.

Changing the Color Mode

Available Color Modes

Parent topic: Using Basic Projector Features

Changing the Color Mode

You can change the projector's Color Mode using the remote control to optimize the image for your

viewing environment.

1. Turn on the projector and switch to the image source you want to use.

140

2. If you are projecting from a DVD player or other video source, insert a disc or other video media and

press the play button, if necessary.

3. Press the Color Mode button on the remote control to change the Color Mode.

The image appearance changes and the name of the Color Mode appears briefly on the screen.

4. To cycle through all the available Color Modes for your input signal, press the Color Mode button

repeatedly.

Parent topic: Color Mode

Available Color Modes

You can set the projector to use these Color Modes, depending on the input source you are using:

Color Mode Description

Presentation Best for color presentations in a bright room

Dynamic Best for video games in a bright room

Cinema Best for movies projected in a dark room with natural tone images

sRGB Best for standard sRGB computer displays

Blackboard Best for projecting images directly on a green chalkboard

DICOM SIM Best for projecting X-rays and other medical images (shows clear

shadows)

Multi-Projection

(BrightLink 1485Fi)

Best for projecting from multiple projectors (reduces the color tone

difference between images)

Note: The DICOM SIM color mode is for reference purposes only and should not be used to make

medical diagnoses.

141

Parent topic: Color Mode

Adjusting the Hue, Saturation, and Brightness

You can adjust the hue, saturation, and brightness settings for individual image colors.

1. Turn on the projector and switch to the image source you want to use.

2. Press the Menu button.

3. Select the Image menu and press Enter.

4. Select RGBCMY and press Enter.

142

5. Select the color to adjust and press Enter.

6. Do the following as necessary for each setting:

• To adjust the overall hue of the color (bluish, greenish, reddish), adjust the Hue setting.

• To adjust the overall vividness of the color, adjust the Saturation setting.

• To adjust the overall brightness of the color, adjust the Brightness setting.

7. Press Menu or Esc to exit the menus.

Parent topic: Using Basic Projector Features

Adjusting Gamma

You can adjust the gamma to improve differences in halftone brightness that vary depending on the

connected device.

143

Note: Project a still image to adjust the gamma; you cannot adjust it properly when projecting a movie or

other moving video. Medical images may not reproduce correctly depending on your operating

environment and screen.

1. Turn on the projector and switch to the image source you want to use.

2. Press the Menu button.

3. Select the Image menu and press Enter.

4. Select the Gamma setting and press Enter.

5. Select and adjust the correction value.

You see a screen like this:

When you select a smaller value, you can reduce the overall brightness of the image to make the

image sharper. When you select a larger value, the dark areas of images become brighter, but the

color saturation for lighter areas may become weaker.

Note: If you set the Color Mode setting to DICOM SIM in the projector's Image menu, select the

adjustment value according to the projection size. If the projection size is 80 inches (203 cm) or less,

select a small value. If the projection size is 80 inches or more, select a large value.

6. If you want to make finer adjustments, select Custom and press Enter.

7. Press the left or right arrow button to select the tone you want to change, then press the up or down

arrow button to adjust the tone and press Enter.

144

You see a screen like this:

8. Press Menu or Esc to exit the menus.

Parent topic: Using Basic Projector Features

Adjusting the Image Resolution

You can adjust the image resolution to project a clear image with an emphatic texture and material feel.

1. Turn on the projector and switch to the image source you want to use.

2. Press the Menu button.

145

3. Select the Image menu and press Enter.

4. Select Image Enhancement and press Enter.

5. Select Image Preset Mode and press Enter.

6. Select the preset option and press Enter.

Note: The following settings saved in the preset option are applied to the image:

•Noise Reduction

•MPEG Noise Reduction

•Deinterlacing

•Super-resolution

•Detail Enhancement

7. Adjust each setting in the projector's Image menu individually as necessary.

• Adjust the Noise Reduction setting to reduce flickering in images.

• Adjust the MPEG Noise Reduction setting to reduce the noise or artifacts seen in MPEG video.

146

• Adjust the Deinterlacing setting to convert interlaced-to-progressive signals for certain video

image types (only displayed when the current signal is interlaced [480i/576i/1080i]).

• Adjust the Super-resolution setting to reduce blurring when projecting low-resolution images.

• Adjust the Detail Enhancement setting to create a more emphatic texture and material feel of the

image.

The setting values in the preset option are overwritten as you make changes.

8. Press Menu or Esc to exit the menus.

Parent topic: Using Basic Projector Features

Adjusting the Projector's Brightness Level

You can adjust the brightness of your projector's light source.

1. Turn on the projector and switch to the image source you want to use.

2. Press the Menu button.

3. Select the Operation menu and press Enter.

147

4. Select Light Source Brightness Control and press Enter.

5. If you want to maintain the brightness at a specific level, select the Maintain Brightness setting and

select On.

6. If you turn on Maintain Brightness, select the Maintain Brightness Level setting and check the

Estimated Remains information.

7. If you turn off Maintain Brightness, select the Light Source Mode setting:

•Normal: Sets brightness to the maximum level (ideal for conference rooms, auditoriums, and

lecture halls)

•Quiet: Sets brightness to 70% and reduces fan noise (ideal for libraries, theaters, museums, and

art galleries)

•Extended: Sets brightness to 70% and extends the life expectancy of the light source (ideal for

darker environments with ambient light, such as museums and art galleries, where a reduced

maintenance cycle is desired)

•Custom: Allows you to select a custom brightness level between 70 to 100%

8. If you set the Light Source Mode setting to Custom, select Brightness Level and use the left and

right arrow buttons to select the brightness.

9. Press Menu or Esc to exit the menus.

Note: For the best results in maintaining the brightness level, set the Light Source Calibration

setting to Run Periodically in the projector's Management menu.

Constant Brightness Usage Hours

Parent topic: Using Basic Projector Features

148

Related references

Administration Settings - Management Menu

Related tasks

Saving a Scheduled Event

Constant Brightness Usage Hours

If you turn on the Maintain Brightness setting, the number of hours the projector can maintain constant

brightness is displayed as the Estimated Remains setting.

Display level Estimated remaining hours

10000 or more hours

8000 to 9999 hours

6000 to 7999 hours

4000 to 5999 hours

2000 to 3999 hours

149

Display level Estimated remaining hours

0 to 1999 hours

Light source life span

The estimated life span of the light source varies depending on the Brightness Level setting and

whether the Maintain Brightness setting is on or off.

Maintain Brightness off

Brightness Level setting Hours

100% 20000 hours

90% 21000 hours

80% 24000 hours

70% 30000 hours

Maintain Brightness on

1 Brightness level

2 Time the projector can maintain constant brightness (approximate)

Brightness Level setting Hours

85% 6000 hours

80% 10000 hours

70% 19000 hours

Note: The light source usage hours vary depending upon environmental conditions and usage. The

hours listed here are an approximate and are not guaranteed. You may need to replace internal parts

150

sooner than the estimated light source operation time. If Maintain Brightness is turned on, and you

have exceeded the usage hours listed here, you may not be able to select a high Maintain Brightness

Level setting.

Parent topic: Adjusting the Projector's Brightness Level

Turning On Dynamic Contrast

You can turn on the Dynamic Contrast setting to automatically optimize the image luminance. This

improves the image contrast based on the brightness of the content you project.

1. Turn on the projector and switch to the image source you want to use.

2. Press the Menu button.

3. Select the Image menu and press Enter.

4. Select the Dynamic Contrast setting, choose one of the following options, and press Enter:

•Normal to adjust brightness at the standard speed.

•High Speed to adjust brightness as soon as the scene changes.

151

5. Press Menu or Esc to exit the menus.

Parent topic: Using Basic Projector Features

Controlling the Volume with the Volume Buttons

You can use the Volume buttons on the remote control to adjust the volume of your projected content.

The volume buttons control the projector’s internal speaker system or any external speakers you

connected to the projector.

You must adjust the volume separately for each connected input source.

1. Turn on the projector and start a presentation that includes audio.

2. To lower or raise the volume, press the Volume buttons on the remote control.

A volume gauge appears on the screen.

3. To set the volume to a specific level for an input source, use the projector menus.

Parent topic: Using Basic Projector Features

Inverting the Audio Channels

You can invert the audio's left and right channels to match the projector installation position.

1. Turn on the projector and start a presentation.

2. Press the Menu button.

152

3. Select the Signal I/O menu and press Enter.

4. Set the Inverse Audio setting to On.

5. Press Menu or Esc to exit the menus.

Parent topic: Using Basic Projector Features

Selecting a Quick Startup Setting

If you want to quickly restart the projector within five seconds after turning it off, you can change the

Quick Startup setting. You can select 20, 60, or 90 minutes of Quick Startup time.

Note: The projector may take longer than five seconds to start up in the following conditions:

• When projecting from the projector's USB-B1 or HDMI Out port

• When projecting with Screen Mirroring

• If whiteboard sharing was terminated in the previous session

• If you want to restore the whiteboard contents from the previous session

153

Note: The Quick Startup setting is displayed only if the A/V Output setting in the Signal I/O menu is set to

While Projecting, the Auto Power On setting in the Network menu is set to Off, and the Power On

Trigger setting in the Operation menu is set to Plug-in Detection.

1. Turn on the projector.

2. Press the Menu button.

3. Select the Operation menu and press Enter.

4. Select the Quick Startup setting and press Enter.

5. Select how long you want to enable Quick Startup mode for and press Enter.

6. Press Menu or Esc to exit the menus.

Press the power button to quickly restart the projector in this mode.

Parent topic: Using Basic Projector Features

154

Projecting a PC Free Presentation

You can use your projector's PC Free feature whenever you connect a USB device that contains

compatible files. This lets you quickly and easily display the contents of the files and control their display

using the projector's remote control.

Supported PC Free File Types

Starting a PC Free Slideshow

Starting a PC Free Movie Presentation

PC Free Display Options

Parent topic: Using Basic Projector Features

Supported PC Free File Types

You can project these types of files using the projector's PC Free feature.

Note: For best results, place your files on media that is formatted in FAT16/32. If you have trouble

projecting from media formatted for non-Windows file systems, try formatting the media for Windows

instead. You may not be able to use the security features on certain USB storage devices with PC Free

features. When connecting a USB-compatible hard drive, connect the AC adapter supplied with the

drive. PC Free may not work with USB device security features. If you are using a connected card

reader, the projector can recognize up to five cards.

File type and

extension

Details

Image (.jpg) Make sure the file is not:

• CMYK format

• Progressive format

• Highly compressed

• Above 8192 × 8192 resolution

Image (.bmp) Make sure the file resolution is not above 1280 × 800

Image (.gif ) Make sure the file is not:

• Above 1280 × 800 resolution

• Animated

• Interlaced

155

File type and

extension

Details

Image (.webp) Make sure the file resolution is not:

• Above 1920 × 1200

• Interlaced

Motion JPEG

movie (.avi)

Supports only AVI 1.0

Make sure the file is not:

• Saved with a video codec other than Motion JPEG

• Saved with an audio codec other than LPCM or IMA ADPCM

• Above 1280 × 720 resolution

• Larger than 2GB

• Saved with a frame rate higher than 30 fps

• Saved with an audio sampling rate other than 11.025 kHz, 16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24

kHz, 32 kHz, or 44.1 kHz

H.264, H.265

(.mp4/.mov)

Make sure the file is not:

• Larger than 2GB

• Above 1920 × 1200 resolution

• A color format other than YUV420

• Saved with a movie codec other than H.264/MPEG-4 AVC (Baseline Profile, Main

Profile, High Profile) or H.265/MPEG-H HEVC (Main Profile)

• Saved with a frame rate higher than 30 fps

• Saved with an audio codec other than MPEG-2 AAC-LC, MPEG-4 AAC-LC, or

LPCM

• Saved with an audio sampling rate other than 11.025 kHz, 16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24

kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, or 48 kHz for LPCM, or 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz for MPEG-2

AAC-LC and MPEG-4 AAC-LC

• Saved with audio other than 8-bit or 16-bit and up to 2 channels

• A format other than single slice structure

Parent topic: Projecting a PC Free Presentation

156

Starting a PC Free Slideshow

After connecting a USB device or digital camera to the projector, you can switch to the USB input source

and start your slideshow.

Note: You can change the slideshow operation options or add special effects by highlighting Option at

the bottom of the screen and pressing Enter.

Note: You can also use the interactive pen or your finger to operate the slideshow.

1. Press the USB button on the projector remote control until the PC Free file list appears.

The PC Free screen appears.

2. Do the following as necessary to locate your files:

• If you need to display files inside a subfolder on your device, press the arrow buttons to highlight

the folder and press Enter.

• To move back up a folder level on your device, highlight Back to Top and press Enter.

• To view additional files in a folder, highlight Next page or Previous page and press Enter.

157

• To display images from a different USB drive, select Select Drive at the top of the PC Free screen

and press Enter.

3. Do one of the following:

• To display an individual image, press the arrow buttons to highlight the image and press Enter.

(Press the Esc button to return to the file list screen.)

• To display a slide show of all the images in a folder, press the arrow buttons to highlight the

Slideshow option at the bottom of the screen and press Enter.

Note: If any file names are longer than the display area or include unsupported symbols, the file

names may be shortened or changed only in the screen display.

4. While projecting, use the following commands to control the display as necessary:

• To rotate a displayed image, press the up or down arrow button. You can also rotate the image by

flicking it with the interactive pen or your finger.

• To move to the next or previous image, press the left or right arrow button. You can also move

between images by flicking the image with the interactive pen or your finger.

Note: You can use the Freeze,A/V Mute, and E-Zoom functions while projecting in PC Free mode.

5. To stop the display, follow the on-screen instructions or press the Esc button.

6. Turn off the USB device, if necessary, and then disconnect the device from the projector.

Parent topic: Projecting a PC Free Presentation

Starting a PC Free Movie Presentation

After connecting a USB device or digital camera to the projector, you can switch to the USB input source

and start your movie.

Note: You can change the operation options by highlighting Option at the bottom of the screen and

pressing Enter.

1. Press the USB button on the projector remote control until the PC Free screen appears.

158

The PC Free screen appears.

2. Do the following as necessary to locate your files:

• If you need to display files inside a subfolder on your device, press the arrow buttons to highlight

the folder and press Enter.

• To move back up a folder level on your device, highlight Back to Top and press Enter.

• To view additional files in a folder, highlight Next page or Previous page and press Enter.

• To display movie files from a different USB drive, select Select Drive at the top of the PC Free

screen and press Enter.

3. To play back a movie, press the arrow buttons to highlight the file and press Enter.

Note: If any file names are longer than the display area or include unsupported symbols, the file

names may be shortened or changed only in the screen display. If you want to play back all the

movies in a folder in sequence, select the Slideshow option at the bottom of the screen.

4. To stop movie playback, press the Esc button, highlight Exit, and press Enter.

5. Turn off the USB device, if necessary, and then disconnect the device from the projector.

159

Parent topic: Projecting a PC Free Presentation

PC Free Display Options

You can select these display options when using the projector's PC Free feature.

Setting Options Description

Display Order Name Order Displays files in name order

Date Order Displays files in date order

Sort Order In Ascending Sorts files in first-to-last order

In Descending Sorts files in last-to-first order

Continuous Play On Displays a slideshow continuously

Off Displays a slideshow one time through

Screen Switching

Time

No Does not display the next file automatically

1 Second to 60 Seconds Displays files for the selected time and

switches to the next file automatically; high

resolution images may switch at a slightly

slower rate

160

Setting Options Description

Effect No No effect

Wipe Transitions between images with a wipe effect

Dissolve Transitions between images with a dissolve

effect

Random Transitions between images using a random

variety of effects

Parent topic: Projecting a PC Free Presentation

161

Adjusting Projector Features

Follow the instructions in these sections to use your projector's feature adjustments.

Shutting Off the Picture and Sound Temporarily

Stopping Video Action Temporarily

Zooming Into and Out of Images

Using Multiple Projectors (DuoLink)

Projecting Multiple Images Simultaneously

Projector Security Features

Creating a User Pattern to Display

Saving Settings to Memory and Using Saved Settings

Copying Menu Settings Between Projectors

Scheduling Projector Events

Shutting Off the Picture and Sound Temporarily

You can temporarily turn off the projected picture and sound if you want to redirect your audience's

attention during a presentation. Any sound or video action continues to run, however, so you cannot

resume projection at the point that you stopped it.

If you want to display an image such as a company logo or picture when the presentation is stopped, you

can set up this feature using the projector's menus.

1. Press the A/V Mute button on the remote control to temporarily stop projection and mute any sound.

162

2. To turn the picture and sound back on, press A/V Mute again.

Note: The projector's power automatically turns off thirty minutes after A/V Mute is enabled. You can

disable this feature in the projector's Operation menu.

Note: You can also stop projection by selecting the A/V Mute icon in the interactive toolbar.

Parent topic: Adjusting Projector Features

Related tasks

Saving a User's Logo Image to Display

Stopping Video Action Temporarily

You can temporarily stop the action in a video or computer presentation and keep the current image on

the screen. Any sound or video action continues to run, however, so you cannot resume projection at the

point that you stopped it.

Note: You can also stop video action using the interactive pens.

1. Press the Freeze button on the remote control to stop the video action.

2. To restart the video action in progress, press Freeze again.

Parent topic: Adjusting Projector Features

163

Zooming Into and Out of Images

You can draw attention to parts of a presentation by zooming into a portion of the image and enlarging it

on the screen.

Note: This feature is unavailable if the Scale setting in the Image menu is enabled (BrightLink 1485Fi).

1. Press the E-Zoom + button on the remote control.

You see a crosshair on the screen indicating the center of the zoom area.

2. Use the following buttons on the remote control to adjust the zoomed image:

• Use the arrow buttons to position the crosshair in the image area you want to zoom into.

• Press the E-Zoom + button repeatedly to zoom into the image area, enlarging it as necessary.

Press and hold the E-Zoom + button to zoom in more quickly.

• To pan around the zoomed image area, use the arrow buttons.

• To zoom out of the image, press the E-Zoom – button as necessary.

• To return to the original image size, press the Esc button.

Parent topic: Adjusting Projector Features

164

Using Multiple Projectors (DuoLink)

You can combine the projected images from two or more projectors to create one large image

(BrightLink 1485Fi). Follow the instructions in these sections to set up and project from multiple

projectors.

Note: Wait at least 30 minutes after you start projecting before adjusting the image.

Note: The interactive features are not available when connecting more than two projectors. See the

online Edge Blending Setup Guide (available only in English) for additional information.

Projector Identification System for Multiple Projector Control

Adjusting Color Uniformity

Blending the Image Edges

Matching the Image Colors

Adjusting the Black Level

Adjusting RGBCMY

Scaling an Image

Parent topic: Adjusting Projector Features

Projector Identification System for Multiple Projector Control

You can operate multiple projectors using one remote control for more elaborate presentations. To do

this, you assign an identification number to each projector and to the remote control. Then you can

operate all the projectors at once or individually.

Setting the Projector ID

Setting the Remote Control ID

Parent topic: Using Multiple Projectors (DuoLink)

Setting the Projector ID

If you want to control multiple projectors from a remote control, give each projector a unique ID.

1. Press the Menu button.

2. Select the Multi-Projection (BrightLink 1485Fi) or Installation (BrightLink 1480Fi) menu and press

Enter.

165

3. Select Projector ID and press Enter.

4. Press the arrow buttons on the remote control to select the identification number you want to use for

the projector. Then press Enter.

Repeat these steps for all the other projectors you want to operate from one remote control.

Note: If you don't know the projector's ID, aim the remote control at the projector and press the ID button

to temporarily display the projector's ID on the screen.

Parent topic: Projector Identification System for Multiple Projector Control

Setting the Remote Control ID

The remote control's ID is set to zero by default so it can operate any compatible projector. If you want to

set the remote control to operate only a particular projector, you need to set the remote control's ID to

match the projector's ID.

1. Turn on the projector you want the remote control to operate with exclusively.

2. Make sure you know the projector's ID number as set in the Multi-Projection menu Projector ID

setting.

3. Aim the remote control at that projector.

166

4. Hold down the ID button on the remote control while you press the numeric button that matches the

projector's ID. Then release the buttons.

The remote control's ID is set.

Note: If the batteries are left out of the remote control for an extended period, the remote control ID

returns to its default setting.

Parent topic: Projector Identification System for Multiple Projector Control

Adjusting Color Uniformity

If the color tone is uneven on each screen, adjust the color tone balance in the Multi-Projection menu of

each projector. (The color tone may not be uniform even after performing color uniformity.)

Note: Set the Color Mode setting in each projector's Image menu to Multi-Projection before you start

projecting (BrightLink 1485Fi).

167

1. Press the Menu button on the remote or control panel, select the Multi-Projection menu, and press

Enter.

168

2. Select the Color Uniformity setting and press Enter.

3. Select On as the Color Uniformity setting and press Enter, then press Esc.

4. Select Adjustment Level and press Enter.

5. Select an adjustment level and press Esc.

6. Select Start Adjustments and press Enter.

169

7. Select the area you want to adjust and press Enter.

8. Select Red,Green, or Blue and press the left arrow button to weaken the color tone or the right

arrow button to strengthen the color tone.

Note: The adjustment screen changes each time you press Enter.

9. Press Esc to return to the area selection screen.

10. Repeat steps 7 through 9 for each area, then select All to adjust the entire screen.

11. Press Esc to exit the menus.

Parent topic: Using Multiple Projectors (DuoLink)

Related references

Image Quality Settings - Image Menu

170

Blending the Image Edges

You can use the projector's Edge Blending feature to create a seamless image from multiple projectors

(BrightLink 1485Fi).

1. Press the Menu button.

2. Select the Multi-Projection menu and press Enter.

3. Select the Edge Blending setting and press Enter.

171

4. Turn on the Edge Blending,Line Guide, and Pattern Guide settings.

Note: Select a different Guide Color setting for each projector so that you can see the blended area

clearly.

5. Select the edge you want to blend on each projector and press Enter. For the projector on the

left, select the Right Edge and for the projector on the right, select Left Edge.

You see a screen like this:

6. Select the Blending setting and select On.

7. Press Esc to return to the previous screen.

8. Select the Blend Start Position setting and adjust the point where edge blending begins.

Note: If you created a 3:1 unified image area using the Edge Blending feature, set the Blend Start

Position setting to 600 (BrightLink 1485Fi).

172

9. Select the Blend Range setting and use the arrow buttons to select the width of the blended area so

that the displayed guides are at the edges of the overlapping area between the two images.

Note: If you created a unified image area using the Edge Blending feature, set the Blend Range

setting to 600. Depending on your installation environment, you can also set the Blend Range

setting to 600 or less but black bands may appear on the side of the projected screen.

10. Press Esc to go back to the previous screen.

11. Select the Blend Curve setting and select a gradient for the shaded area on the projectors.

12. When the edges are blended, turn off the Line Guide and Pattern Guide settings on each projector

to check the final settings.

13. When you are finished, press the Menu button.

If the blended area does not overlap exactly, correct the shape of the blended area using Point

Correction.

Parent topic: Using Multiple Projectors (DuoLink)

Matching the Image Colors

You can match the display color of multiple projectors that will project next to one another (BrightLink

1485Fi). Turn on all the projectors so you can properly adjust the color of the combined screen.

1. Press the Menu button.

173

2. Select the Multi-Projection menu (BrightLink 1485Fi) and press Enter.

3. Select the Color Matching setting and press Enter.

You see this screen:

174

4. Press the left or right arrow button to select Adjustment Level 8.

Note: There are several adjustment levels and you can adjust each level individually.

5. Press the left or right arrow buttons to adjust the Brightness setting.

6. Press the left or right arrow buttons to adjust the color tone for the Red,Green, and Blue settings if

necessary.

7. Press Esc to return to the Multi-Projection menu.

8. Select the Operation menu and press Enter.

9. Select Light Source Brightness Control and press Enter.

10. Set the Light Source Mode setting to Custom and adjust the Brightness Level setting as

necessary.

11. Press Esc and repeat steps 2 through 6 for Adjustment Level 7 through 2.

12. When you are finished, press the Menu button.

Parent topic: Using Multiple Projectors (DuoLink)

Adjusting the Black Level

When two images overlap, the overlapping area can appear differently from the areas that do not

overlap. You can use the projector's Black Level setting to make the difference less noticeable

(BrightLink 1485Fi).

175

Note: You cannot adjust the black levels while projecting a test pattern, and you may not be able to

adjust the black levels correctly if the Geometry Correction settings are set too high. The brightness

and tone of the overlapping areas may differ from the rest of the image even after adjusting the black

level.

1. Press the Menu button.

2. Select the Multi-Projection menu and press Enter.

3. Select the Black Level setting and press Enter.

Note: The Black Level setting is displayed only if Edge Blending is enabled and at least one (top,

bottom, left, right) edge is set to On.

4. Select the Color Adjustment setting and press Enter.

You see a screen based on the Top Edge,Bottom Edge,Right Edge, and Left Edge settings you

selected for the Edge Blending setting.

176

5. Select the area you want to adjust and press Enter.

Note: The area you selected is displayed in orange. Adjust overlapping areas starting with the

brightest areas first. For example, adjust area 2 to match area 1, then adjust area 3 to match area 2.

6. Adjust the brightness and tone of the areas that do not overlap to match the areas that overlap using

the displayed adjustment sliders. Then press the Esc button.

7. Repeat the previous two steps as needed until all areas match.

8. If the tone of some areas do not match, you can adjust them using the Area Correction setting.

Continue with the next step. Otherwise, press the Menu button to exit.

9. Press the Esc button to return to the Black Level screen.

10. Select the Area Correction setting and press Enter.

11. Select the Start Adjustments setting and press Enter.

You see a screen with boundary lines indicating areas that are overlapping. The boundary lines are

based on the Top Edge,Bottom Edge,Right Edge, and Left Edge settings you selected for the

Edge Blending setting.

12. Use the arrow buttons to select a boundary line of the area you want to adjust and press Enter.

177

The selected line is displayed in orange.

13. Use the arrow buttons to adjust the boundary line position and press Enter.

14. Use the arrow buttons to select an adjustment point and press Enter.

Note: You can change the number of adjustment points displayed by changing the Points setting in

the Area Correction menu.

The selected point turns orange.

15. Use the arrow buttons to move the point.

16. To move another point, press the Esc button and repeat the previous two steps.

17. To move another boundary line, press the Esc button repeatedly until you can select a boundary

line.

18. When you are finished, press the Esc button until you see a confirmation message. Select Yes and

press Enter.

19. When you are finished, press the Menu button.

178

Note: Changing the Top Edge,Bottom Edge,Right Edge, or Left Edge settings resets the Black

Level setting to its default value.

Parent topic: Using Multiple Projectors (DuoLink)

Adjusting RGBCMY

You can adjust the Hue,Saturation, and Brightness settings for R (red), G (green), B (blue), C (cyan),

M (magenta), and Y (yellow) color components.

Turn on all the projectors and select the RGBCMY setting in each projector's Image menu so that the

color tone on the combined screen becomes entirely even.

1. Press the Menu button.

2. Select the Image menu and press Enter.

179

3. Select the RGBCMY setting and press Enter.

4. Select the color you want to adjust and press Enter.

You see this screen:

• To adjust the overall hue of the color, adjust the Hue setting.

• To adjust the overall vividness of the color, adjust the Saturation setting.

• To adjust the overall brightness of the color, adjust the Brightness setting.

5. Press the left or right arrow buttons to adjust the Hue,Saturation, and Brightness settings.

6. Repeat the previous two steps as necessary to adjust each color.

7. Press Menu or Esc to exit the menus.

Parent topic: Using Multiple Projectors (DuoLink)

180

Scaling an Image

You can project the same image from multiple projectors and use the Scale feature to crop and combine

them into one large image (BrightLink 1485Fi).

1. Press the Menu button.

2. Select the Multi-Projection menu and press Enter.

3. Select the Scale setting and press Enter.

You see this screen:

4. Select one of the following as the Scale setting:

•Auto to automatically adjust the clipped areas according to the HDMI Out Setting and Edge

Blending settings you selected

•Manual to adjust the clipped areas manually

181

5. Select the Scale Mode setting and select one of these options:

•Zoom Display to maintain the image aspect ratio as you scale the image

•Full Display to adjust the image to the projector's screen size as you scale the image

6. If you selected Auto as the Scale setting, you can skip the remaining steps. If you selected Manual,

adjust each of the following options as necessary:

• Select –or +to scale the image horizontally and vertically at the same time

• Select Scale Vertically to scale the image vertically only

• Select Scale Horizontally to scale the image horizontally only

7. Select the Clip Adjustment setting and use the arrow buttons to adjust the coordinates and size of

each image as you view the screen.

182

8. Select the Clip Range setting to preview the area you just selected.

9. Press the Menu button to exit.

Parent topic: Using Multiple Projectors (DuoLink)

Projecting Multiple Images Simultaneously

You can use the split screen feature to simultaneously project from two or four images from different

image sources next to each other. You can control the split screen feature using the remote control, the

projector menus, or the interactive function.

Note: While you use the split screen feature, other projector features may not be available and some

settings may be automatically applied to all images.

Note: You cannot use split screen with certain input source combinations. You cannot perform split

screen projection when the Connect ELPCB02 setting is set to On in the Installation menu. You may not

be able to perform split screen projection when you use the Scale or Edge Blending options.

183

Note: If you are projecting content from one source, you can split the projected image with a whiteboard

screen. Click the link below for more information.

1. Press the Split button on the remote control.

Note: You can also select Split Screen from the Home screen.

You are prompted for the number of screens.

2. Select 2 Screens or 4 Screens, depending on the number of input sources you want to project.

If you selected 2 Screens, the currently selected input source moves to the left side of the screen. If

you selected 4 Screens and used the split screen feature to project four images before, the

projected images are arranged in the same order as they were previously.

3. Press the Menu button.

You see a screen like this:

4. Press the arrow and Enter buttons to select an image source for each section of the screen.

184

5. To choose the audio you want to hear, select an input source as the Audio Source setting.

6. To select the input source to be controlled by finger or pen interactivity, select an input source as the

PC Interactivity setting.

Note: A Touch Unit is optional for the BrightLink 1480Fi and must be installed to enable finger touch

operation.

Note: A Touch Unit is optional and must be installed to enable finger touch operation. When USB

Display is not selected as one of the input sources, you cannot select the PC Interactivity source.

7. If you selected 2 Screens and want to change the size of the images, select a sizing option as the

Screen Size setting.

8. Select Execute and press Enter.

9. To exit the split screen feature, press the Split or Esc button.

Input Sources for Split Screen Projection

Split Screen Projection Restrictions

Parent topic: Adjusting Projector Features

Related tasks

Splitting the Projected Image with Whiteboard Mode

Input Sources for Split Screen Projection

You can choose most input source combinations for split screen projection, but the following

combinations are not supported:

•HDMI2,HDMI3,HDBaseT

•Computer1,Computer2,Video

•USB1,USB2,USB Display,LAN

•HDMI2,HDMI3 (BrightLink 1480Fi)

Note: The HDBaseT source is available only for the BrightLink 1485Fi. When you split the screen into

quarters and select the USB1 or USB input source, you can select only Screen Mirroring1 or Screen

Mirroring2 for the other input sources.

Parent topic: Projecting Multiple Images Simultaneously

185

Split Screen Projection Restrictions

You cannot perform the following operations during split screen projection:

• Change settings in the projector's menu

• E-Zoom

• Switching the aspect mode (the aspect mode is set to Auto)

• Operations using the User button on the remote control, other than displaying the network information

on the projected surface

• Applying the Dynamic Contrast setting

• Displaying the network information on the projected surface by a method other than pressing the User

button

• Displaying the Screen Mirroring information bar

Image restrictions

• Even if you set No-signal screen to Logo in the Display menu, the blue screen appears when no

image signal is being input

• When you create a single, unified image projected from multiple projectors and use the split screen

feature, the second projector detects no image signal

Parent topic: Projecting Multiple Images Simultaneously

Projector Security Features

You can secure your projector to deter theft or prevent unintended use by setting up the following

security features:

• Password security to prevent the projector from being turned on, and prevent changes to the startup

screen and other settings.

• Button lock security to block operation of the projector using the buttons on the control panel.

• Security cabling to physically cable the projector in place.

Password Security Types

Locking the Projector's Buttons

Installing a Security Cable

Parent topic: Adjusting Projector Features

186

Password Security Types

You can set up these types of password security using one shared password:

•Power On Protection password prevents anyone from using the projector without first entering a

password.

•User's Logo password prevents anyone from changing the custom screen the projector can display

when it turns on. The presence of the custom screen discourages theft by identifying the projector’s

owner.

•Network password prevents anyone from changing the network settings in the projector menus.

•Schedule password prevents anyone from changing the projector's time or schedule settings.

•Interactive password prevents anyone from changing the projector's interactive settings.

Setting a Password

Selecting Password Security Types

Entering a Password to Use the Projector

Saving a User's Logo Image to Display

Parent topic: Projector Security Features

Setting a Password

To use password security, you must set a password.

Note: The default password is set to 0000.

1. Hold down the Freeze button on the remote control for about 5 seconds or until you see this menu.

2. Press the down arrow to select Password and press Enter.

You see the prompt "Change the password?".

187

3. Select Yes and press Enter.

4. Press and hold down the Num button on the remote control and use the numeric buttons to set a

four-digit password.

The password displays as **** as you enter it. Then you see the confirmation prompt.

5. Enter the password again.

You see the message "Password accepted."

6. Press Esc to return to the menu.

7. Make a note of the password and keep it in a safe place in case you forget it.

Parent topic: Password Security Types

Selecting Password Security Types

After setting a password, you see this menu, allowing you to select the password security types you want

to use.

If you do not see this menu, hold down the Freeze button on the remote control for about five seconds or

until the menu appears.

• To prevent unauthorized use of the projector, select Power On Protection, press Enter, select On,

press Enter again, and press Esc.

188

• To prevent changes to certain projector settings, select Menu Protection, press Enter, and do the

following as necessary:

• To prevent changes to the User's Logo screen or related display settings, select User's Logo, press

Enter, select On, press Enter again, and press Esc.

• To prevent changes to the projector's time or schedule settings, select Schedule, press Enter,

select On, press Enter again, and press Esc.

• To prevent changes to network settings, select Network, press Enter, select On, press Enter

again, and press Esc.

• To prevent changes to the projector's interactive settings, select Interactive, press Enter, select

On, press Enter again, and press Esc.

You can attach the Password Protect sticker to the projector as an additional theft deterrent.

Note: Be sure to keep the remote control in a safe place; if you lose it, you will not be able to enter the

password required to use the projector.

Parent topic: Password Security Types

Entering a Password to Use the Projector

If a password is set up and a Power On Protection password is enabled, you see a prompt to enter a

password whenever you turn on the projector.

You must enter the correct password to use the projector.

189

1. Press and hold down the Num button on the remote control while you enter the password using the

numeric buttons.

Note: The default password is 0000.

The password screen closes.

2. If the password is incorrect, the following may happen:

• You see a "wrong password" message and a prompt to try again. Enter the correct password to

proceed.

• If you have forgotten the password, make note of the Request Code: xxxxx number that appears

on the screen and contact Epson Support.

• If you enter an incorrect password three times in succession, you see a message telling you that

the projector is locked. After the message is displayed for 5 minutes, the projector enters standby

mode. Unplug the projector, plug in the power cord, and turn on the projector. You see a prompt to

enter the password.

• If you continue to enter an incorrect password many times in succession, the projector displays a

request code and a message to contact Epson Support. Do not attempt to enter the password

again. When you contact Epson Support, provide the displayed request code and proof of

ownership for assistance in unlocking the projector.

Parent topic: Password Security Types

Related references

Where to Get Help (U.S. and Canada)

Saving a User's Logo Image to Display

You can transfer an image to the projector and then display it whenever the projector turns on. You can

also display the image when the projector is not receiving an input signal or when you temporarily stop

projection. This transferred image is called the User's Logo screen.

190

The image you select as the User's Logo can be a photo, graphic, or company logo, which is useful in

identifying the projector's owner to help deter theft. You can prevent changes to the User's Logo by

setting up password protection for it.

Note: You cannot save an image that is protected by HDCP as a User's Logo.

Note: When you copy the menu settings from one projector to another using the batch setup feature, the

user logo is also copied. Do not include any information in the user logo that you do not want to share

between multiple projectors.

1. Display the image you want to project as the User's Logo.

2. Press the Menu button, select the Management menu, and press Enter.

3. Select the User's Logo setting and press Enter.

4. Select Start Setting and press Enter.

You see a prompt asking if you want to use the displayed image as a user's logo.

191

Note: When you select User's Logo, adjustments such as Geometry Correction,E-Zoom,

Aspect,Scale (BrightLink 1485Fi), and Screen Type are temporarily canceled.

5. Select Yes and press Enter.

Note: Depending on the image signal, the screen size may change to match the resolution of the

image signal.

6. Make sure the image appears as you want it, then select Yes again and press Enter.

You see a completion message.

7. Press Esc to exit the message screen.

8. Select the Display menu and press Enter.

9. Select when you want to display the User's Logo screen:

• To display it whenever there is no input signal, select No-Signal Screen and set it to Logo.

• To display it whenever you turn the projector on, select Startup Screen and set it to On.

To prevent anyone from changing the User's Logo settings without first entering a password, set a

password and enable User's Logo security.

Parent topic: Password Security Types

Related tasks

Selecting Password Security Types

Setting a Password

Locking the Projector's Buttons

You can lock the buttons on the projector's control panel to prevent anyone from using the projector. You

can lock all the buttons or all the buttons except the power button.

1. Press the Menu button.

192

2. Select the Management menu and press Enter.

3. Select the Control Panel Lock setting and press Enter.

4. Select one of these lock types and press Enter:

• To lock all of the projector's buttons, select Full Lock.

• To lock all buttons except the power button, select Except for Power.

You see a confirmation prompt.

5. Select Yes and press Enter.

Unlocking the Projector's Buttons

Parent topic: Projector Security Features

Unlocking the Projector's Buttons

If the projector's buttons have been locked, hold the Enter button on the projector's control panel for 7

seconds to unlock them. You can also set the Control Panel Lock setting to Off in the Management

menu.

Parent topic: Locking the Projector's Buttons

193

Related references

Administration Settings - Management Menu

Installing a Security Cable

You can install two types of security cables on the projector to deter theft.

• Use the security slot on the projector to attach a Kensington lock. See your local computer or

electronics dealer for purchase information.

• Use the security cable attachment point on the projector to attach a wire cable and secure it to a room

fixture or heavy furniture.

Parent topic: Projector Security Features

Creating a User Pattern to Display

You can transfer an image to the projector and then display it as a pattern to aid in presentations when

you use the Pattern Display feature. This transferred image is called the User Pattern.

Note: Once you save a user pattern, you cannot restore the default pattern. You cannot save an image

that is protected by HDCP. If a pattern is displayed for a long time, a residual image may be visible in

projected images.

1. Display the image you want to project as the User Pattern from a connected computer or video

source.

194

2. Press the Menu button, select the Management menu, and press Enter.

3. Select the User Pattern setting and press Enter.

You see a prompt asking if you want to use the displayed image as a User Pattern.

Note: When you select User Pattern, adjustments such as Keystone,E-Zoom,Aspect,Adjust

Zoom, or Image Shift are temporarily canceled.

4. Select Yes and press Enter.

Note: It takes a few moments for the projector to save the image; do not use the projector, its remote

control, or any connected equipment until it is finished.

You see a completion message.

5. Press Esc to exit the message screen.

To view your user pattern, press the Menu button, select the Display menu, and press Enter. Set the

Pattern Type setting to User Pattern, then return to the Display menu and select Pattern Display.

Parent topic: Adjusting Projector Features

195

Saving Settings to Memory and Using Saved Settings

You can save customized settings for each of your video inputs and then select the saved settings

whenever you want to use them.

1. Turn on the projector and display an image.

2. Press the Menu button.

3. Select the Memory menu and press Enter.

You see this screen:

4. Select one of the following options:

•Load Memory: Overwrites your current settings with saved settings

•Save Memory: Saves your current settings to memory (10 memories with different names are

available)

Note: A memory name that has already been used is indicated by a blue mark. Saving over a

previously saved memory overwrites the settings with your current settings.

196

•Erase Memory: Erases the selected memory settings

•Rename Memory: Renames a saved memory

•Reset Memory Settings: Delete all saved memory

5. Press Esc to exit.

Parent topic: Adjusting Projector Features

Copying Menu Settings Between Projectors

After you select menu settings for your projector, you can transfer them to another projector of the same

model.

Note: Copy the projector's settings before you adjust the projected image using the projector's Geometry

Correction settings. Any saved User's Logo setting on the projector will transfer to the other projector.

Caution: If the copy process fails due to a power failure, communication error, or for any other reason,

Epson will not be responsible for any repair costs incurred.

The following settings will not transfer between projectors:

• Light Source Hours

• Status

The following settings will not transfer between projectors if you set the Batch Setup Range setting to

Limited:

• Password Protection settings

•EDID in the Signal I/O menu

• Network menu settings

Note: In addition to the methods covered in this section, you can also copy and transfer settings to

multiple projectors over a network using the Epson Projector Management software. See the online

Epson Projector Management Operation Guide for instructions. You can download the latest software

and documentation from the Epson website.

Saving Settings to a USB Flash Drive

Transferring Settings from a USB Flash Drive

Saving Settings to a Computer

Transferring Settings from a Computer

197

Parent topic: Adjusting Projector Features

Saving Settings to a USB Flash Drive

You can save the projector settings you want to transfer to a USB flash drive.

Note: Use an empty flash drive. If the drive contains other files, the transfer may not complete correctly.

The flash drive must use the FAT format and cannot have any security features.

1. Turn off the projector and unplug the power cord from the projector's power inlet.

2. Insert the flash drive into the USB-A1 or USB-A2 port.

Note: Connect the flash drive directly to the projector. Do not use a hub or your settings may not be

saved correctly.

3. Press and hold the Esc button on the control panel or remote control as you connect the power cord

to the projector's power inlet.

4. When the power and Status lights are blue, and the Laser and Temp lights are orange, release the

Esc button.

The lights flash to indicate that settings are transferring to the flash drive. When the lights stop

flashing, the power light turns blue and the projector enters standby mode.

Caution: Do not unplug the power cord or remove the flash drive while the lights are flashing. This

could damage the projector.

198

5. Once the projector enters standby mode, remove the flash drive.

Note: If the projector does not enter standby mode and the lights continue flashing, see the link

below for a solution.

Parent topic: Copying Menu Settings Between Projectors

Related references

Projector Light Status

Transferring Settings from a USB Flash Drive

After saving projector settings to a USB flash drive, you can transfer them to another projector of the

same model.

Note: Make sure the USB flash drive contains only a single settings transfer from another projector of

the same model. The settings are contained in a file called pjconfdata.bin. If the drive contains other

files, the transfer may not complete correctly.

Do not adjust image settings on a projector until after you transfer settings to it. Otherwise, you may have

to repeat your adjustments.

1. Turn off the projector and unplug the power cord from the projector's power inlet.

2. Insert the flash drive into one of the USB-A ports.

Note: Connect the flash drive directly to the projector. Do not use a hub or your settings may not be

saved correctly.

199

3. Press and hold the Menu button on the control panel or remote control as you connect the power

cord to the projector's power inlet.

4. When the power and Status lights are blue, and the Laser and Temp lights are orange, release the

Menu button.

The lights flash to indicate that settings are transferring to the projector. When the lights stop

flashing, the power light turns blue and the projector enters standby mode.

Caution: Do not unplug the power cord or remove the flash drive while the lights are flashing. This

could damage the projector.

5. Once the projector enters standby mode, remove the flash drive.

Note: If the projector does not enter standby mode and the lights continue flashing, see the link

below for a solution.

Parent topic: Copying Menu Settings Between Projectors

Related references

Projector Light Status

Saving Settings to a Computer

You can save the projector settings you want to transfer to a computer.

Your computer must be running one of the following operating systems:

• Windows 7

• Windows 8.x

• Windows 10

• OS X 10.11.x

• macOS 10.12.x

• macOS 10.13.x

• macOS 10.14.x

• macOS 10.15.x

1. Turn off the projector and unplug the power cord from the projector's power inlet.

200

2. Connect a USB cable to your projector's USB-B1 port.

3. Connect the other end to any available USB port on your computer.

4. Press and hold the Esc button on the control panel or remote control as you connect the power cord

to the projector's power inlet.

5. When the power and Status lights are blue, and the Laser and Temp lights are orange, release the

Esc button.

The projector shows up as a removable disk on your computer.

6. Open the removable disk and copy the pjconfdata.bin file to your computer.

7. Once the file has copied, do one of the following:

•Windows: Open the My Computer,Computer,Windows Explorer, or File Explorer utility.

Right-click the name of your projector (listed as a removable disk) and select Eject.

•Mac: Drag the removable disk icon for your projector from the desktop into the trash.

The projector turns off when you disconnect the USB cable.

Note: If the projector does not turn off and the lights continue flashing, see the link below for a

solution.

Parent topic: Copying Menu Settings Between Projectors

Related references

Projector Light Status

201

Transferring Settings from a Computer

After saving projector settings to a computer, you can transfer them to another projector of the same

model.

Your computer must be running one of the following operating systems:

• Windows 7

• Windows 8.x

• Windows 10

• OS X 10.11.x

• macOS 10.12.x

• macOS 10.13.x

• macOS 10.14.x

• macOS 10.15.x

Do not adjust image settings on a projector until after you transfer settings to it. Otherwise, you may have

to repeat your adjustments.

1. Turn off the projector and unplug the power cord from the projector's power inlet.

2. Connect a USB cable to your projector's USB-B1 port.

3. Connect the other end to any available USB port on your computer.

4. Press and hold the Menu button on the control panel or remote control as you connect the power

cord to the projector's power inlet.

5. When the power and Status lights are blue, and the Laser and Temp lights are orange, release the

Menu button.

202

The projector shows up as a removable disk on your computer.

6. Copy the pjconfdata.bin file from your computer to the removable disk.

Note: Do not copy any other files to the removable disk.

7. Once the file has copied, do one of the following:

•Windows: Open the My Computer,Computer,Windows Explorer, or File Explorer utility.

Right-click the name of your projector (listed as a removable disk) and select Eject.

•Mac: Drag the removable disk icon for your projector from the desktop into the trash.

Various projector lights start flashing to indicate that the projector's settings are being updated.

When the lights stop flashing, remove the USB cable from the projector. The projector enters

standby mode.

Caution: Do not unplug the power cord while the lights are flashing. This could damage the

projector.

Note: If the projector does not turn off and the lights continue flashing, see the link below for a

solution.

Parent topic: Copying Menu Settings Between Projectors

Related references

Projector Light Status

Scheduling Projector Events

You can save a projector command, such as turning the projector on or off or switching input sources, as

an "event." You can schedule when you want the projector to automatically execute the command.

Caution: Do not place flammable objects in front of the lens. If you schedule the projector to turn on

automatically, flammable objects in front of the lens could catch on fire.

Note: The Schedule setting in the Menu Protection menu must be turned off to schedule an event.

Saving a Scheduled Event

Viewing Scheduled Events

Editing a Scheduled Event

203

Parent topic: Adjusting Projector Features

Related tasks

Selecting Password Security Types

Setting a Password

Saving a Scheduled Event

You can select projector commands you want to perform and schedule them as an event.

Note: Light Source Calibration events do not start if the projector is not used continuously for at least 20

minutes, or if the projector is regularly turned off by shutting off the power outlet. Set Light Source

Calibration events to occur only after 100 hours of usage.

Note: The Schedule setting in the Menu Protection menu must be turned off to schedule an event.

1. Set the date and time in the Management menu.

2. Press the Menu button.

3. Select the Management menu and press Enter.

4. Select the Schedule Settings setting and press Enter.

5. Select the Schedule menu and press Enter.

6. Select Add New and press Enter.

204

You see a screen like this:

205

7. In the Event Settings section, select the events you want to have occur. (Select No Change for

events that you do not want to occur.)

8. In the Date/Time Settings section, set the date and time for the scheduled events to occur.

9. When you are finished, select Save and press Enter.

10. To schedule more events, repeat the previous steps as necessary.

11. Select Setup complete and press Enter to save your changes.

Parent topic: Scheduling Projector Events

Viewing Scheduled Events

You can view your scheduled events on the calendar displayed on the Schedule Settings screen.

1. Press the Menu button.

2. Select the Management menu and press Enter.

3. Select Schedule Settings and press Enter.

4. Select Schedule and press Enter.

206

You see a screen like this:

Colored boxes on the calendar indicate the following:

One-time event

Repeating event

Communication is on or off

Event is invalid

5. To view an event, press the left and right arrow buttons on the remote to select a day.

The screen displays the details of the events scheduled for that day. A blue icon indicates an

enabled event, a gray icon indicates a disabled event, and the icon indicates a repeating event.

Parent topic: Scheduling Projector Events

Editing a Scheduled Event

You can edit any currently scheduled event.

1. Press the Menu button.

207

2. Select the Management menu and press Enter.

3. Select the Schedule Settings setting and press Enter.

You see a screen like this:

4. Press the left or right arrow buttons to highlight the date on the calendar containing the scheduled

event you want to edit.

5. Press the up or down arrow buttons to highlight the event you want to edit, and press Enter.

6. Select one of the following:

•Enabled/Disabled to enable or disable the selected event.

•Edit to edit the settings for the selected event.

•Clear to delete the selected event.

•Add New to add a new scheduled event.

7. When you are finished, select Return and press Enter.

8. Select Setup complete and press Enter to save your changes.

Note: To delete all scheduled events, select Schedule Reset and select Yes.

208

Parent topic: Scheduling Projector Events

209

Using the Interactive Features

Follow the instructions in these sections to use your projector's interactive features.

Interactive Modes

Using the Interactive Pens

Using Finger Touch Interactivity

Using BrightLink with a Computer

Windows Pen Input and Ink Tools

Whiteboard Mode

Using BrightLink Without a Computer

Splitting the Projected Image with Whiteboard Mode

Sharing the Projected Screen

Using Interactive Features with Two Projectors (DuoLink)

Interactive Modes

The BrightLink interactive features turn any flat wall into an interactive whiteboard, either with or without

a computer. These interactive modes are available:

• In Whiteboard mode, you can use one or both interactive pens and up to 6 fingers to write on the

projected "whiteboard". You can split the screen and interact with the whiteboard and another

projected source. You can insert images from a USB drive or scanner and save, print, or email your

whiteboard pages without connecting a computer.

• In built-in Annotation mode (PC Free Annotation), you can annotate over content projected from a

computer, tablet, document camera, or other source. You can capture your annotated pages, and

save or print them. You can even split the screen and annotate on up to four images at the same time,

using one or both pens or your finger.

• In PC Interactive mode, you can use the interactive pen or your finger as a mouse to navigate, select,

and scroll through content from your computer. You can split the screen into four and interact with the

computer on one screen and annotate an image on the other three screens.

Note: A Touch Unit is optional for the BrightLink 1480Fi and must be installed for finger touch operation.

Note: You can also use the Easy Interactive Tools software to provide additional interactive features,

such as saving your annotations and printing them. See the online Easy Interactive Tools Operation

Guide for detailed instructions.

210

Using the Projected Screen as a Whiteboard (Built-in Whiteboard Mode)

Drawing on a Projected Image (Built-in Annotation Mode)

Controlling Computer Features from a Projected Screen (PC Interactive Mode)

Parent topic: Using the Interactive Features

Using the Projected Screen as a Whiteboard (Built-in Whiteboard Mode)

You can use the interactive pens or your finger to write or draw on the projection surface just as you

would on a chalkboard or dry erase board. You can use one pen, both pens at the same time, or a

combination of pens and finger touch.

Note: A Touch Unit is optional for the BrightLink 1480Fi and must be installed for finger touch operation.

1. Press the Home button on the remote control and select Whiteboard.

You see the whiteboard screen, with the toolbar on the bottom of the screen:

2. To move the toolbar to the right, left, top, or bottom of the screen, use the pen or your finger to drag it

to the desired location.

3. To show or hide the toolbar, select the icon.

Note: You can also show or hide the projector control toolbar by setting the Interactive > Display

Toolbars setting to Always Show or Hide for Set Time.

Parent topic: Interactive Modes

211

Related references

Interactive Settings - Interactive Menu

Drawing on a Projected Image (Built-in Annotation Mode)

You can project from a computer, tablet, video device, or other source and annotate over your projected

content using the interactive pens or your finger. You can use one pen, both pens at the same time, or a

combination of pens and finger touch.

Note: A Touch Unit is optional for the BrightLink 1480Fi and must be installed for finger touch operation.

1. Project an image from a connected device.

You see the toolbar on the bottom of the projected image.

2. To move the toolbar to the right, left, top, or bottom of the screen, use the pen or your finger to drag it

to the desired location.

3. To switch to one of the other interactive modes, do one of the following:

• To split the screen with whiteboard mode, select the Whiteboard icon on the toolbar.

• To switch to PC Interactive mode, switch to the input source for the connected computer or select

the PC Interactivity icon on the toolbar and make sure it is set to On if the

computer is already connected.

212

4. To show or hide the toolbar, select the icon.

Note: You can also show or hide the projector control toolbar by setting the Interactive > Display

Toolbars setting to Always Show or Hide for Set Time.

Parent topic: Interactive Modes

Related references

Interactive Settings - Interactive Menu

Controlling Computer Features from a Projected Screen (PC Interactive Mode)

You can navigate, select, and interact with your computer programs from the projected screen using the

interactive pens or your finger just as you would a mouse.

Note: A Touch Unit is optional for the BrightLink 1480Fi and must be installed for finger touch operation.

Mac users need to install the Easy Interactive Driver before using PC Interactive mode. Go to

epson.com/support (U.S.) or epson.ca/support (Canada) and select your projector.

1. Connect your computer to any available video input port on the projector other than a USB port.

2. Connect your computer to the projector's USB-B1 port.

Note: When using the control pad (BrightLink 1485Fi), you need to connect your computer to the

control pad with an HDMI cable and a USB cable plugged in to the control pad's USB-B port. If you

are connecting over a network, you do not need a USB cable.

3. Turn on your projector and computer to project your computer screen.

213

4. Press the Menu button on the remote control, select the Pen/Touch menu, and press the Enter

button.

5. Select the PC Interactivity setting and press the Enter button.

6. Select one of the following as the Pen Tracking Mode depending on the operating system your

computer is using:

•Pen Mode: Windows or Mac

•Mouse Mode: Ubuntu

7. Press the Enter button and press the Menu button to exit the projector's menus.

8. Hover near or tap on the board or the projected image with the interactive pen or your finger.

9. Make sure that PC Interactivity is enabled on the toolbar.

Note: You can use PC Interactive mode when connected over a network or with a USB cable

(connecting via USB is recommended). When connected via USB, enable the USB Display setting

in the projector's Signal I/O menu and connect the computer to the projector's USB-B1 port or the

USB-B port on the control pad (BrightLink 1485Fi). When projecting using USB Display, response

time may be slower.

214

You can now operate the computer using the interactive pens or your finger.

PC Interactive Mode System Requirements

Parent topic: Interactive Modes

PC Interactive Mode System Requirements

Your computer system must meet the system requirements here to use PC Interactive mode and Easy

Interactive Tools.

Note: Easy Interactive Driver must be installed and running to use Easy Interactive Tools on a Mac.

Requirement Windows Mac

Operating system Windows 7 SP1 Ultimate, Enterprise,

Professional, and Home Premium (32-

and 64-bit)

OS X 10.11.x; macOS 10.12.x,

macOS 10.13.x, macOS 10.14.x,

macOS 10.15.x, macOS 11.x (64-

bit)

Windows 8.1, Pro and Enterprise (32-

and 64-bit)

Windows 10 Home and Pro (32- and

64bit)

CPU Intel Core2 Duo 1.2 GHz or faster (Intel

Core i3 or faster recommended)

Intel Core2 Duo 1.2 GHz or faster

(Intel Core i5 or faster

recommended)

Memory 1GB or more (2GB or more

recommended)

2GB or more (4GB or more

recommended)

Hard disk space 100MB or more

Display Resolution between 1024 × 768 and 1920 × 1200, 16-bit color or greater

Parent topic: Controlling Computer Features from a Projected Screen (PC Interactive Mode)

Using the Interactive Pens

Follow the instructions in these sections to use the interactive pens.

Using the Pens

Pen Calibration

Parent topic: Using the Interactive Features

215

Using the Pens

Your projector came with a blue pen and an orange pen, identified by the color strip at the end of the

pen. You can use either pen, or both pens at the same time (one of each color) in built-in whiteboard or

annotation mode.

Make sure the pen batteries are installed.

Note: The pen turns off automatically after 15 seconds of inactivity. Hold the pen to turn the pen back on.

Note: If you are using two pens at the same time, make sure to use them at least 4 inches (10.16 cm)

apart to avoid interference.

1 Pen tip

2 Battery light

3 Function button

4 Attachment for optional strap or cord

5 Battery cover

216

• To turn on the pen, move the pen.

Note: To check the battery, press and hold the function button. If the battery is low, the light flashes. If

the light does not turn on or flash, replace the battery.

• For best performance, hold the pen perpendicular to the board, as shown below. Do not cover the

black section near the tip of the pen.

• To write or draw on the projection surface in built-in Annotation mode or built-in Whiteboard mode, do

the following:

• To select a projected item, such as an icon, tap the projection surface with the pen tip.

• To draw on the projected screen, tap the projection surface with the pen and drag it as necessary.

• To move the pointer, hover over the surface without touching it.

• To switch the pen from drawing tool to eraser or a different function, press the button on the side.

217

Note: You can change the function of the button by changing the Pen Button Function setting in

the Interactive menu.

• To use the pen as a mouse in PC Interactive mode, do the following:

• To left-click, tap the board with the pen tip.

• To double-click, tap twice.

• To right-click, press the button on the side or press and hold the pen on the screen.

Note: To make a long press of the pen act as a right-click on a Mac or PC, set the Pen Tracking

Mode setting to Mouse Mode and set the Press and Hold setting to Right Click.

• To click and drag, tap and drag with the pen.

• To move the cursor, hover over the board without touching it.

Note: You can turn off the hovering feature using the Pen Hovering setting in the projector's

Pen/Touch menu.

Parent topic: Using the Interactive Pens

Related references

Pen and Touch Setup Settings - Pen/Touch Menu

Interactive Settings - Interactive Menu

Pen Calibration

Calibration coordinates the position of the pen with the location of your cursor. You only need to calibrate

the first time you use your projector's interactive features. Calibration results remain until you calibrate

again.

218

Be sure to calibrate the pen before performing finger touch calibration.

If you notice positioning discrepancies after doing any of the following, calibrate again:

• Performing Geometry Correction

• Adjusting the image size

• Using the Image Shift feature

• Moving the projector

Note: When two projectors are connected and projecting interactive content (BrightLink 1485Fi), draw a

line across the two screens after pen calibration and make sure the screens are aligned correctly. If the

line position does not match, realign the screens and perform calibration again.

Note: Move any pen you are not using away from the projection screen while calibrating.

Calibrating Automatically

Calibrating Manually

Parent topic: Using the Interactive Pens

Calibrating Automatically

You do not need the pens or a computer for Auto Calibration.

Note: You can start Auto Calibration by pressing the User button on the remote control or by pressing

the Menu button on the remote control as described here.

219

1. Press the Menu button, select the Pen/Touch menu, and press Enter.

2. Select Auto Calibration and press Enter.

This screen appears:

3. Adjust the image focus, if necessary.

4. Check that the image pattern fits into the projected display, then press Enter to select Yes.

220

A pattern appears then disappears, and the system is calibrated. If you see a message that

calibration failed, you need to calibrate manually.

The cursor location and pen position should match after calibration. If not, you may need to calibrate

manually.

Parent topic: Pen Calibration

Related tasks

Calibrating Manually

If the cursor location and pen position do not match after auto calibration, you can calibrate manually.

1. Press the Menu button, select the Pen/Touch menu, and press Enter.

2. Select Manual Calibration and press Enter.

221

This screen appears:

3. Adjust the image focus, if necessary.

4. Press Enter to select Yes.

A green circle appears in the upper left corner of your projected image.

5. Touch the center of the circle with the tip of the pen.

The circle disappears, and you see another circle below the first one.

222

Note: For the most accurate calibration, make sure you touch the center of the circle.

Note: Make sure you are not blocking the signal between the pen and the interactive receiver (next

to the projector lens).

6. Touch the center of the next circle, then repeat. When you get to the bottom of the column, the next

circle appears at the top of a new column.

Note: If you make a mistake, press the Esc button on the remote control or control panel to go back

to the previous circle. To cancel the calibration process, press and hold the Esc button for 2

seconds.

7. Continue until all of the circles disappear.

223

Parent topic: Pen Calibration

Using Finger Touch Interactivity

You can use your finger to perform the same functions as the interactive pens when you install the

Touch Unit.

Note: See the online Installation Guide for detailed instructions on installing the Touch Unit (BrightLink

1485Fi). If your product did not come with a Touch Unit, you can use a compatible Touch Unit that you

already have or you can purchase one as an optional accessory (BrightLink 1480Fi).

Touch Unit Safety Instructions

Performing Touch Unit Angle Adjustment

Calibrating for Finger Touch Interactivity

Using Finger Touch Operations

Parent topic: Using the Interactive Features

Touch Unit Safety Instructions

The Touch Unit enables finger touch interactivity with your projector. Do not connect it to any other

projectors or devices.

A built-in, high-power laser is emitted from the laser diffusion ports on the bottom of the Touch Unit.

Follow these precautions when using the Touch Unit and finger touch interactivity:

• Children using finger touch interactivity should always be accompanied by an adult.

• Never disassemble or modify the Touch Unit. Never open any cases on the projector or Touch Unit.

Electrical voltages inside the projector can cause severe injury.

224

• Do not look into the laser diffusion ports on the back of the Touch Unit. The laser can damage your

eyes. Extra care should be taken when children are present.

• Do not allow the laser light from the Touch Unit to pass through or be reflected by any optical devices,

such as a magnifying glass or mirror. This could cause personal injury or fire.

• Do not view the laser light from the Touch Unit using an optical device such as an eye loupe,

magnifying glass, or microscope, especially within 2.75 inches (70 mm) of the laser diffusion ports.

This could damage your eyes.

• Unplug the projector from the electrical outlet and refer all repairs to qualified service personnel if any

problems occur with the Touch Unit. Continued use of the Touch Unit may result in fire or accidents,

and can also damage your eyes.

The Touch Unit is a Class 1 laser product that complies with IEC/EN60825-1:2007. The labels indicating

the Class 3B laser product and warnings are located in the following area on the Touch Unit:

Parent topic: Using Finger Touch Interactivity

Performing Touch Unit Angle Adjustment

Adjust the angle of the laser light coming from the Touch Unit so that the Touch Unit can detect the

position of your fingers. Once you have performed angle adjustment for the Touch Unit, perform touch

calibration.

Note: Make sure you have calibrated the pens, installed the Touch Unit, and turned the Touch Unit on

before performing angle adjustment. See the online Installation Guide for Touch Unit installation

information and click the link below for pen calibration instructions.

225

1. Press the Menu button, select the Installation menu, and press Enter.

2. Select Touch Unit and press Enter.

3. Select Touch Unit Setup and press Enter.

226

The following screen appears:

4. Select the option for the Touch Unit installation method that was used and press Enter.

5. If you are using the Touch Unit Bracket, turn the adjustment screw on the bracket counterclockwise

until it stops.

6. Attach the two markers to the positions shown on the projected screen making sure the thinner ends

of the markers are facing the Touch Unit.

Note: Do not place anything other than the markers near the projected image during angle

adjustment. If other objects are on or near the projected image, angle adjustment may not be

performed correctly.

227

7. Move each marker over the projected cross until the lines of the cross align with the lines on the

marker. Make sure to match the positions so that the crosses overlap with the points on the marker

positions.

Note: If the magnets won't attach to the screen completely, wipe the area to remove any dirt and try

again. For non-magnetic screens, use the supplied tape to secure the markers.

8. Press Enter on the remote control or control panel to begin the auto adjustment.

9. When adjustments are complete, remove the markers.

Note: If auto adjustment fails, follow the instructions on the screen to manually adjust the angle of

the laser and run auto adjustment again.

228

10. Touch each of the four yellow circles on the screen and verify that the gray touch indicator appears

in the correct position.

Note: Finger touch operations may not function correctly if you are wearing bandages, artificial nails,

nail polish, or anything else that may obstruct your fingers.

If the gray indicators do not appear where you touched the screen, you need to manually adjust the

touch unit alignment.

11. Select Up using the remote control or control panel and press Enter.

Try touching the four dots again and repeat this process until the touch indicators appear in the

correct position.

12. When you are finished with adjustments, select Close.

Parent topic: Using Finger Touch Interactivity

229

Related tasks

Calibrating for Finger Touch Interactivity

Finger touch calibration coordinates the positioning of your finger with the location of the cursor.

Note: Make sure you have calibrated the pens, installed the Touch Unit, performed angle adjustment,

and turned the Touch Unit on before calibrating for finger touch interactivity. See the online Installation

Guide for Touch Unit installation information.

1. Press the Menu button, select the Installation menu, and press Enter.

230

2. Select Touch Unit and press Enter.

3. Select Touch Calibration and press Enter.

The following screen appears:

Note: If Touch Calibration is disabled, make sure Power is set to On.

4. Adjust the image focus, if necessary.

5. Press Enter to select Yes.

A green circle appears in the upper left corner of your projected image.

231

6. Touch and hold the center of the circle with your finger until the circle disappears and another circle

appears, then release it.

The circle disappears, and you see another circle below the first one.

Note: For the most accurate calibration, make sure you touch the center of the circle with the tip of

your finger.

Note: Make sure you are not blocking the signal between your finger and the interactive receiver

(next to the projector lens).

7. Touch the center of the next circle with your finger and continue until all of the circles disappear.

232

When you get to the bottom of a column, the next circle appears at the top of a new column.

Note: If you make a mistake, press the Esc button on the remote control or control panel to go back

to the previous circle. It may take several seconds after all of the dots have disappeared for touch

calibration to be completed. To cancel the calibration process, press and hold the Esc button for 2

seconds.

8. If the cursor location and your finger position do not match, repeat these steps to calibrate again.

Parent topic: Using Finger Touch Interactivity

Related concepts

Pen Calibration

Related references

Pen and Touch Setup Settings - Pen/Touch Menu

Installation Settings - Installation Menu

Related tasks

Performing Touch Unit Angle Adjustment

Using Finger Touch Operations

You can use your finger to interact with the projected screen, just as you would use an interactive pen.

You can use either a pen or your finger, or use both at the same time.

233

When performing touch operations with your finger, you can use up to six fingers (depending on the

interactive mode, operating system, and connection type).

Note: A Touch Unit is optional for the BrightLink 1480Fi and must be installed for finger touch operation.

1. Install the Touch Unit as described in the online Installation Guide.

Note: If you are using an older Touch Unit, refer to the installation guide for that model.

2. Turn on your projector. This automatically turns on the Touch Unit also.

The blue light on the Touch Unit turns on.

Note: If the blue light does not turn on, press the Menu button on the remote control and make sure

the Installation > Touch Unit > Power setting is set to On.

3. Calibrate the pens.

4. Adjust the angle of the Touch Unit as described in the online Installation Guide.

Note: If you are using an older Touch Unit, refer to the angle adjustment steps in the installation

guide for that model.

5. Calibrate for finger touch interactivity.

234

6. To write or draw on the projection surface, do the following:

• To select a projected item, such as an icon, tap the projection surface with your finger.

• To draw on the projected screen, tap the projection surface with your finger and drag it as

necessary.

7. To use your finger as a mouse in PC Interactive mode, do the following:

• To left-click, tap the board with your finger.

• To double-click, tap twice with your finger.

• To right-click, press the board with your finger for about 3 seconds (Windows).

• To click and drag, press on and drag an item with your finger.

• To scroll, drag your finger on the screen.

235

8. If your operating system supports these functions, you can also do the following:

• To zoom in or out, touch an item using two fingers and either move your fingers away from each

other (zoom in) or toward each other (zoom out).

• To rotate an image, touch the image with your fingers and rotate your hand.

• To drag up or down on a page, or move backward or forward in a browser window, use swiping

gestures or flicks.

Note: Finger touch operations may not work correctly with long or artificial nails, or fingers wearing

bandages. If your fingers are too close together or crossed, or your sleeve or free hand touches the

screen, finger touch may not be recognized. Some operating systems may not support gestures such as

flicks.

Parent topic: Using Finger Touch Interactivity

Related references

Pen and Touch Setup Settings - Pen/Touch Menu

Installation Settings - Installation Menu

Using BrightLink with a Computer

You can connect a computer to the projector and install the Easy Interactive Tools software from the

website. Make sure your computer is connected to the USB-B port on the projector or the control pad

(BrightLink 1485Fi) with a USB cable. You can then do the following:

• Use the pens or your finger as a mouse to control your computer

• Use the Easy Interactive Tools software to annotate with both pens or a combination of pen and finger

touch at the same time

Note: A Touch Unit is optional for the BrightLink 1480Fi and must be installed for finger touch

operation.

Note: See the online Easy Interactive Tools Operation Guide for detailed information.

• Save and print your annotations

• Use the Tablet PC input panel in Windows 10, Windows 8.x, or Windows 7

• Use Ink Tools for annotation in Microsoft Office (2007 or later) applications

• Connect to a remote computer and control it with the interactive pens or your finger

236

• Annotate across two projectors (BrightLink 1485Fi)

Adjusting the Pen Operation Area

Easy Interactive Tools

Parent topic: Using the Interactive Features

Adjusting the Pen Operation Area

If you connect a different computer or adjust the computer's resolution, the pen operation area is

adjusted automatically to match your mouse pointer position. If you notice that the pen position is

incorrect when using PC Interactive mode, you can adjust the pen area manually.

Note: Manual adjustment is not available when projecting from a LAN source.

Note: To perform manual pen area adjustment, the computer must be connected to the USB-B1 port on

the projector or the USB-B port on the projector control pad (BrightLink 1485Fi).

1. Project your computer's desktop.

2. Press the Menu button, select the Pen/Touch menu, and press Enter.

237

3. Select the PC Interactivity setting and press Enter.

You see a screen like this:

4. Make sure Auto Adjust Pen Area is set to Off, then select Manual Adj. Pen Area and press

Enter.

You see this screen:

5. Press Enter to select Yes.

238

The mouse pointer moves toward the top left corner.

6. When the mouse pointer stops, touch the tip of the pointer with the interactive pen.

The mouse pointer moves toward the bottom right corner.

7. When the mouse pointer stops, touch the tip of the pointer with the interactive pen.

Parent topic: Using BrightLink with a Computer

Easy Interactive Tools

You can download the Easy Interactive Tools software for use with a computer. Easy Interactive Tools

lets you use your interactive pen or finger to draw, save, and interact with projected content from your

computer.

Note: A Touch Unit is optional for the BrightLink 1480Fi and must be installed for finger touch operation.

These two modes are available:

• Annotation (PC interactive) mode displays the toolbar on the projected image and lets you use the pen

or finger as a mouse to open applications, access links, and operate scroll bars, for example. You can

also annotate over whatever is displayed from your computer (using both pens and up to six fingers at

the same time).

• Whiteboard mode lets you project on one of 6 background patterns in 3 color options, and use the

toolbar to write or draw on the background. You can also import images from your computer or a

document camera. In full screen whiteboard mode, two people can use the pens at the same time.

Finger touch is also available in whiteboard mode.

Note: For detailed instructions on using the Easy Interactive Tools software, see the online Easy

Interactive Tools Operation Guide or the online help.

Parent topic: Using BrightLink with a Computer

Related references

Additional Projector Software and Manuals

Windows Pen Input and Ink Tools

If you are using Windows 10, Windows 8.x, or Windows 7, you can use the pen input and Ink tools to add

input and annotations to your work. You can also use these features over a network when you set the

interactive features to be available on your network. See the online Epson iProjection Operation Guide

(Windows/Mac) for instructions on setting up your computer for network projection.

239

Enabling Windows Pen Input and Ink Tools

Using Windows Pen Input and Ink Tools

Parent topic: Using the Interactive Features

Enabling Windows Pen Input and Ink Tools

To use the pen input and Ink tools in Windows 10, Windows 8.x, or Windows 7, you need to adjust the

pen operation mode in your projector's menus.

1. Press the Menu button, select the Pen/Touch menu, and press Enter.

2. Select the PC Interactivity setting and press Enter.

240

You see a screen like this:

3. Select Pen Tracking Mode and press Enter.

4. Select Pen Mode and press Enter.

Parent topic: Windows Pen Input and Ink Tools

Using Windows Pen Input and Ink Tools

If you are using Windows 10, Windows 8.x, or Windows 7, you can add handwritten input to your work

and convert it to text.

If you have Microsoft Office 2007 or later, you can also use the Ink function to add handwritten notes to a

Word document, Excel spreadsheet, or PowerPoint presentation.

Note: Option names for the annotation functions may vary depending on your version of Microsoft

Office.

• To open the Touch Keyboard in Windows 10, right-click or tap-and-hold on the Taskbar, and select

Show touch keyboard button. Select the keyboard icon on the screen.

241

• To open the Touch Keyboard in Windows 8.x, right-click or tap-and-hold on the Taskbar, and select

Toolbars > Touch Keyboard. Select the keyboard icon on the screen and select the pen icon.

• To open the Tablet PC input panel in Windows 7, select > All Programs > Accessories > Tablet

PC > Tablet PC Input Panel.

You can write in the box using the interactive pen or your finger, and select from a variety of options to

edit and convert the text.

Note: A Touch Unit is optional for the BrightLink 1480Fi and must be installed for finger touch

operation.

• To add Ink annotations in Microsoft Office applications, select the Draw tab. If the Draw tab does not

appear in your Microsoft Office application, change the Pen Tracking Mode setting in the projector's

menus.

• To annotate your PowerPoint slides in Slideshow mode, press the button on the side of the interactive

pen or press the projection surface with your finger for about 3 seconds, and select Pointer Options >

Pen from the pop-up menu.

For more information about these features, see Windows Help.

Parent topic: Windows Pen Input and Ink Tools

242

Whiteboard Mode

You can use the pens and your fingers to write or draw on the projection surface just as you would on a

chalkboard or dry erase board. A maximum of two pens and six fingers can be used at the same time.

See these sections for instructions.

Note: A Touch Unit is optional for the BrightLink 1480Fi and must be installed for finger touch operation.

Using the Whiteboard Toolbar

The Whiteboard Toolbar

Selecting Background Templates

Inserting and Working With Images

Selecting Whiteboard Settings

Selecting a Networked Device Source

Saving Pages in Whiteboard Mode

Printing Whiteboard Pages

Emailing Whiteboard Pages

Parent topic: Using the Interactive Features

Using the Whiteboard Toolbar

You can use both pens and your fingers to interact with the screen and whiteboard toolbar.

1. Press the Home button on the remote control and select Whiteboard.

You see the whiteboard screen, with the whiteboard toolbar at the bottom:

243

2. To move the toolbar to the right, left, top, or bottom of the screen, drag it to the desired location.

3. To add a new page, select the New page icon above the toolbar.

4. To show or hide the projector control toolbar, select the icon.

Note: You can also show or hide the toolbar by setting the Interactive > Display Toolbars setting

to Always Show or Hide for Set Time.

Parent topic: Whiteboard Mode

The Whiteboard Toolbar

The whiteboard toolbar lets you draw, write, and insert images and shapes.

Note: A mini toolbar also appears when you press the button on the interactive pen anywhere in the

drawing area. You can use the mini toolbar to switch the type of pen or eraser. You can change the

function of the button by changing the Pen Button Function setting in the Interactive menu.

Displays the Home screen.

Toggles the video and audio off and on.

244

Displays additional tools.

Mail: Shares the projected screen with an email recipient (set up the Mail settings in the

Interactive menu first).

Save: Saves the projected screen (set up the Save settings in the Interactive menu first).

Print: Prints the projected screen from a printer on the same network (set up the Print

settings in the Interactive menu first).

Timer: Counts the time up or down.

Volume: Adjusts the projector's volume.

Share Projection: Shares the current screen with devices connected using Epson

iProjection.

Participant List: Displays the user selection screen so you can project from devices

connected to the projector over a network.

Guidance: Displays the help screen for the toolbar functions. Select Close to close the

help screen.

Clear all drawing contents: Clears all current drawings and images and returns the

whiteboard mode to its default status.

Displays the available pen type, thickness, or shape.

(Yellow/Green/Aqua/Pink/Red/Blue for highlighter): Select the color for the

type of pen/shape from the options.

Switches to the eraser tool to erase content from the whiteboard. Select the size of the

eraser.

245

Selects all objects and images in a rectangular area. Specify the area by drawing on the

projection surface. You can also tap an object or image to select it.

• To cancel the current selection, tap an empty area on the board.

• Drag the edge of the area to enlarge or reduce the object or image.

• Drag the icon at the top of the area to rotate the selected object or image.

• To perform the following operations, select the icon at the bottom right of the selected

object or image:

• Duplicate

• Copy

• Paste (tap the location where you want to paste)

• Delete

Undoes the previous action.

Restores a cancelled action.

Clears all drawings from the displayed page.

Disables touch input temporarily to prevent unintended operation. Tap again to enable touch

operation.

Hides the toolbar. Tap again to show the toolbar.

Additional Functions in Whiteboard Mode

Opens a file into a new whiteboard page.

Imports an image to the current whiteboard page.

Selects from 6 pre-installed background templates in 3 different colors.

Enlarges or reduces the projected image (not available when the whiteboard screen is split

with the annotation screen).

Deletes the current whiteboard page.

Displays the previous whiteboard page.

246

Displays the next whiteboard page.

Adds a new whiteboard page after the current page. You can have up to 20 whiteboard

pages.

Follow these guidelines when using the whiteboard toolbar:

• You can display images of up to 2 files per page at 1920 × 1080 pixels on the whiteboard screen

(including images stored on the clipboard).

• To paste an image, you need to use the same pen that you used to cut or copy the image.

• Drawn objects are displayed at the front of the projected page.

• If objects or images are moved out of the projected screen, you may not be able to select them.

Parent topic: Whiteboard Mode

Selecting Background Templates

In whiteboard mode, you can insert horizontal or vertical lines, a graph-paper grid, or another

background template and place it on your whiteboard pages. You can select from 6 pre-installed

templates in 3 different colors.

1. In Whiteboard mode, select the icon to the left of the toolbar.

You see the available templates.

2. Select one of the template patterns or select to import an image.

Note: To import a template image, connect to a USB flash drive or a shared directory containing a

JPG or PNG file. The background image can be 1920 × 1080 pixels or smaller (smaller images will

not fill the page).

Parent topic: Whiteboard Mode

Inserting and Working With Images

In Whiteboard mode, you can use the Insert Image tool to insert an image from a USB flash drive or a

network folder. Images can be in .webp or .jpg format, with a maximum size of 2048 × 2048 pixels. You

can also scan a document or image into a new page using a supported Epson all-in-one printer

connected to the same network or the projector control pad (BrightLink 1485Fi). Once the image is

projected, you can move, resize, or rotate it.

247

Note: You can also use the tool to the left of the toolbar to import files (including .pdf files) in

whiteboard mode.

Note: You cannot scan with standalone scanners or printers that have run out of ink or cannot print. Only

Epson All-in-One products that support ESC/P-R commands are supported. When importing from a

scan, you cannot use the scan button, the partial document or image scanning function, or the Automatic

Document Feeder (ADF), even if these are available on your product.

1. Select the Insert Image tool.

2. Do one of the following:

• Select USB or Network, then locate and select the image you want to add.

• Load your original in the scanner, select Scan, and choose the settings for the scanned image as

necessary.

3. Select Open or Scan.

After a moment, the image appears on the whiteboard page.

4. Select the Select tool and do any of the following as necessary:

• To move the image, touch inside it and drag the image.

• To resize the image, touch any corner and drag inward to shrink or outward to enlarge.

• To rotate the image, touch the icon at the top of the image and drag left or right.

5. Use the menu in the bottom right corner of the image to select any of the following as necessary:

•Duplicate creates a copy of the image on the current whiteboard page.

•Copy copies the image on the whiteboard. Touch a location on the screen to paste a copy of the

image.

•Paste creates a new copy of the image. Drag the image to the desired location.

•Delete removes the image from the whiteboard.

When you are finished, select any other tool from the whiteboard toolbar to exit image editing mode.

Parent topic: Whiteboard Mode

Selecting Whiteboard Settings

Follow the instructions in these sections to select settings for capturing, scanning, saving, printing, and

emailing in Whiteboard mode.

248

Note: If the Menu Protection password setting is set to On for the Interactive option, you cannot

change settings in the Interactive menu.

Selecting Basic Whiteboard Settings

Selecting Whiteboard Print Settings

Selecting Settings for Saving Whiteboard Pages

Selecting Settings for Emailing Whiteboard Pages

Selecting Settings for a Directory Server

Parent topic: Whiteboard Mode

Related tasks

Selecting Password Security Types

Setting a Password

Selecting Basic Whiteboard Settings

You can select the whiteboard features you want to use and control the way whiteboard pages are saved

in the projector.

1. Press the Menu button on the remote control.

2. Select the Interactive menu and press Enter.

249

3. Select the following options as necessary:

•Drawing Function displays the interactive toolbar

•Display Toolbars sets when to display the interactive toolbar

•Display Drawing Area displays the available drawing area

•Confirm Clear Screen displays a confirmation screen before clearing all the drawings from the

projected screen

•Pen Button Function selects the operation performed by the button on the side of the interactive

pen

•Display Clock sets the date and time display format on the whiteboard toolbar (set the date and

time in the Management menu)

•Print shows the Print menu settings

•Save shows the Save menu settings

•Mail shows the Mail menu settings

•Directory shows the Directory menu settings

•Reset Interactive Settings resets all adjustment values on the Interactive menu to their default

settings

4. When you finish selecting settings, press the Menu button to exit the menus.

Parent topic: Selecting Whiteboard Settings

Selecting Whiteboard Print Settings

You can select the default settings for printing whiteboard pages from the projector.

1. Press the Menu button.

250

2. Select the Interactive menu and press Enter.

3. Select Print and press Enter.

4. Select the following printing options as necessary:

•Printer lets you select either USB Printer or Network Printer as the printer connection.

Note: Selecting USB Printer will also enable scanning from Epson all-in-one printers. Only Epson

printers are supported via USB connection.

•Printer Address lets you enter an IP address for a printer connected to the same network as the

projector.

Note: You cannot use the following IP addresses: 127.x.x.x, 192.0.x.x, or 224.0.0.0 through

255.255.255.255 (where x is a number from 0 to 255). To return the IP address to its default value,

enter 0.0.0.0.

•Printer Type lets you manually select the printer type or let the projector automatically determine

the printer type (in most cases, you should leave this setting as Auto Detect).

251

•PCL Type lets you select the PCL type to match the printer type and settings of the connected

network printer.

Note: If printing fails when using a PCL6 printer in Normal mode, try printing in Mode 1 or Mode

•Test Print lets you send a test page to the connected printer.

•Default Paper Size lets you select either Letter or A4 as the default paper size.

Note: Use the displayed keyboard to enter the IP address if necessary. Press the arrow buttons on

the remote control to highlight numbers and press Enter to select them.

5. When you finish selecting settings, press the Menu button to exit the menus.

Parent topic: Selecting Whiteboard Settings

Selecting Settings for Saving Whiteboard Pages

You can select the default settings for saving whiteboard pages from the projector.

1. Press the Menu button.

2. Select the Interactive menu and press Enter.

252

3. Select the Save menu and press Enter.

4. Select the following options as necessary:

•USB Storage lets you save whiteboard page files to a USB thumbdrive.

•PC via USB Cable lets you save whiteboard page files to a device connected to the projector with

a USB cable.

•Network Folder lets you save whiteboard page files to a network folder.

•CIFS Server lets you set the CIFS server's IP address or fully qualified domain name (FQDN).

You can enter up to 64 alphanumeric characters.

Note: You cannot use the following characters: " ' + , : ; < = > ? [ \ ] ` | or spaces. If you need to

enter more characters, enter them using the Web Config utility. To use a FQDN, you must

configure a DNS server. You cannot use the following IP addresses: 127.x.x.x, 192.9.2.x, or

224.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255.

•Shared Folder Path lets you enter the network folder name in this format:

share_name\folder_name or share name. You can enter up to 64 alphanumeric characters. You

cannot use the following characters: " * / : < > ? or |.

•User name lets you enter a user name with read/write privileges on the network folder. You can

enter up to 64 alphanumeric characters. You can enter a domain name by adding it before the

user name and separating them with a backslash in this format: domain\username. Do not use a

colon (":") or spaces.

•Password lets you enter a password for the user name you entered. You can enter up to 64

alphanumeric characters. After you enter the password and select OK, the password is hidden.

Do not use a colon (":") or spaces.

•Check Connection lets you test the network connection.

•Always apply password lets you require that whiteboard files must be saved as password-

protected PDF or EWF2 files.

Note: Use the displayed keyboard to enter the address, user name, and password if necessary.

Press the arrow buttons on the remote control to highlight numbers and press Enter to select

them.

5. When you finish selecting settings, press the Menu button to exit the menus.

Parent topic: Selecting Whiteboard Settings

253

Selecting Settings for Emailing Whiteboard Pages

You can select the settings for emailing whiteboard pages from the projector.

1. Press the Menu button on the remote control.

2. Select the Interactive menu and press Enter.

3. Select the Mail menu and press Enter.

4. Select the following options for emailing as necessary:

•Mail Function lets you share captured whiteboard pages via email.

•SMTP Server lets you enter the IP address or fully qualified domain name (FQDN) for the mail

server. You can enter up to 64 alphanumeric characters. If you specify an FQDN, you must

configure a DNS server. Do not use spaces or the following symbols: " * + , : ; < = > ? [ \ ] ` |

Note: You cannot use the following IP addresses: 127.x.x.x, 192.0.2.x, or 224.0.0.0 to

255.255.255.255 (where x is a number from 0 to 255).

•Port Number lets you enter a port number for the SMTP server. The default port is 25 when set to

Open, 465 for SSL, and 587 for TLS.

254

•Authentication lets you set the type of authentication expected by the mail server.

•User name lets you enter a user name for the mail server. You can enter up to 64 alphanumeric

characters. Do not use a colon (":") or spaces.

•Password lets you enter a password for the mail server. You can enter up to 64 alphanumeric

characters. Do not use a colon (":") or spaces.

•From lets you enter the email address to be displayed to the sender. You can enter up to 64

alphanumeric characters. Do not use spaces or the following symbols: " ( ) , : ; < > [ \ ]

•Default e-mail address lets you enter an optional address for testing. You can enter up to 64

alphanumeric characters. Do not use spaces or the following symbols: " ( ) , : ; < > [ \ ]

•Send a test e-mail lets you connect to the SMTP server and send a test email to the address you

set as the default.

•Disallow Address Input controls whether you can enter email addresses manually. When

enabled, you can only choose email addresses from an address book or directory service.

Note: Use the displayed keyboard to enter the addresses. Press the arrow buttons on the remote

control to highlight numbers or characters and press Enter to select them.

5. When you finish selecting settings, press the Menu button to exit the menus.

Parent topic: Selecting Whiteboard Settings

Selecting Settings for a Directory Server

You can select the settings for specifying a email directory server for your projector.

1. Press the Menu button on the remote control.

255

2. Select the Interactive menu and press Enter.

3. Select Directory and press Enter.

4. Select the following options as necessary:

•Directory Access Function specifies whether to search an active directory server for user names

and email addresses.

•LDAP Server let you enter the IP address or fully qualified domain name (FQDN) for the LDAP

server. You can enter up to 64 alphanumeric characters. Do not use spaces or the following

symbols: " * + , : ; < = > ? [ \ ] ` |. If you specify an FQDN, you must configure a DNS server.

Note: You cannot use the following IP addresses: 127.x.x.x, 192.0.2.x, or 224.0.0.0 to

255.255.255.255 (where x is a number from 0 to 255).

•Port Number lets you enter a port number for the LDAP server. The default port is 389. Specify

"3268" to search the global catalog.

•Authentication lets you set the type of authentication expected by the LDAP server. If you are

using Digest-MD5 or Simple authentication and the LDAP Server setting is set to an IP address,

you must enable reverse DNS lookup on the DNS server.

256

•User Name lets you enter a user name for the mail server. You can enter up to 64 alphanumeric

characters. Use one of the following methods when entering the user name with the domain

name: domain name\user name or user name@domain name. Do not use a colon (":") or spaces.

•Password lets you enter a password for the LDAP server. You can enter up to 64 alphanumeric

characters. Do not use a colon (":") or spaces.

•Check Connection tests the network connection.

•Search Base DN lets you enter the DN (Distinguished Name) where the search for user names

and email addresses should start. You can enter up to 64 alphanumeric characters. Do not use a

colon (":") or spaces. This field is case-sensitive.

Note: Make sure you specify the OU (Organizational Unit) and DC (Domain Component) as

necessary, with OU first in this format: OU=accounts,DC=example,DC=com. The DN must be at

or below the DC level in the database structure.

•User Attributes lets you enter a user name, for example, "cn." You can enter up to 64

alphanumeric characters. Do not use a colon (":") or spaces. This field is case-sensitive.

•Mail Attributes lets you enter the attribute for the mail address. You can enter up to 64

alphanumeric characters. Do not use a colon (":") or spaces. This field is case-sensitive.

•Group Attributes lets you enter the attribute for the user group name. You can enter up to 64

alphanumeric characters. Do not use a colon (":") or spaces. This field is case-sensitive.

•Search target attributes lets you enter the search attributes for user name, email address, and

user group name. You can enter up to 64 alphanumeric characters. Do not use a colon (":") or

spaces. This field is case-sensitive.

Note: The default value is "cn." You can specify up to three keys separated by commas. Do not

use three or more commas, commas right at the start or the end, or continuous commas. The

search is performed using forward matching and returns all results that start with the search keys.

•Additional filter lets you enter an additional filter to Search target attributes. You can enter up

to 64 alphanumeric characters. Do not use a colon (":") or spaces. This field is case-sensitive.

Note: Use the displayed keyboard to enter the addresses. Press the arrow buttons on the remote

control to highlight numbers or characters and press Enter to select them.

5. When you finish selecting settings, press the Menu button to exit the menus.

Parent topic: Selecting Whiteboard Settings

257

Selecting a Networked Device Source

You can project an image from devices connected to the projector via a network. You can select the

image source from computers running Epson iProjection (Windows/Mac) and smartphones or tablets

running the Epson iProjection app.

1. Select the Other Tools icon on the projector toolbar.

2. Select Participant List.

You see a list of available devices. The icon next to a user name indicates the currently selected

source.

3. Select the user name for the device from which you want to project.

Note: You can select Thumbnail to switch the display from user names to thumbnail images of each

device's screen. Select Refresh to update the user list.

4. Select Close.

You see the screen image from the selected device.

While the user selection screen is displayed, you cannot do the following:

• Use other interactive features

• Control the projector from the bottom toolbar

• Connect to multiple projectors

• Hear sound from the projector

• Project an image using Epson iProjection (Windows/Mac)

Note: You cannot access the Participant List screen when connecting to multiple projectors by using

Epson iProjection (Windows/Mac) and projecting the same image (mirroring).

Parent topic: Whiteboard Mode

Saving Pages in Whiteboard Mode

You can save your whiteboard pages as JPG, PDF, PNG, or EWF2 files and select the location where

you want to store your files.

258

Note: You must first set up the Save settings in the projector's Interactive menu. For best results,

connect directly to the projector or control pad (BrightLink 1485Fi) to save whiteboard pages. You may

not be able to use USB flash drives that incorporate security functions.

1. Select the Other Tools icon on the projector toolbar.

2. Select the Save icon.

You see a screen like the following:

3. Select one of the following as the destination where you want to save your file:

•USB or Network to save to a connected USB storage device or network folder

•Computer to temporarily save the file on the projector and make it available for copying from a

computer. After you copy the file, it is erased

Note: You cannot save the file to a computer when the input source is USB Display or the

HDBaseT control pad (BrightLink 1485Fi), or when you have split the screen into halves or

quarters.

4. Select the folder where you want to save your file.

5. To enter a file name, select the File Name text box, use the on-screen keyboard to enter a file name.

259

6. Select one of the following as the Range setting:

•All to save all the pages in the current whiteboard session (PDF or EWF2)

•Current to save only the current whiteboard page

7. Select the file format. If you choose PDF or EWF2 (Epson Whiteboard Format), you can encrypt the

file and add a password. If you choose EWF2, you can reopen the file later and continue editing.

Note: JPG and PNG files are saved as 1920 × 1080 pixels.

8. When you are ready to save the whiteboard pages, select Save or Next.

Parent topic: Whiteboard Mode

Printing Whiteboard Pages

You can print your whiteboard pages directly to a printer and select various print settings for them.

The projector supports the following printer control commands:

• Network connection: ESC/P-R and PCL6

• USB connection (Epson printers only): ESC/P-R

Note: You must first set up the Print settings in the projector's Interactive menu.

1. Select the Other Tools icon on the projector toolbar.

2. Select the Print icon.

260

You see a screen like the following:

3. Select any of the print settings as necessary.

4. When you are ready, select Print.

Parent topic: Whiteboard Mode

Emailing Whiteboard Pages

If your projector is set up on a network and configured to use an email server, you can email your

whiteboard pages as an email attachment directly from the projector.

Note: You must first set up the Mail settings in the projector's Interactive menu.

1. Select the Other Tools icon on the projector's toolbar.

2. Select the Mail icon.

261

You see a screen like the following:

3. Tap the E-mail Address text box, select Add to enter the recipient's email address using the on-

screen keyboard, and select OK.

Note: If you imported an address book or set up a directory service, you can select up to 50 email

addresses by selecting the address book icon.

4. Tap the Subject text box and enter the email subject using the on-screen keyboard, and select OK.

5. Tap the File Name text box and enter the name of the email attachment using the on-screen

keyboard, and select OK.

6. Select the file format for the email attachment. If you choose PDF or EWF2 (Epson Whiteboard

Format), you can encrypt the file and add a password.

262

7. Select one of the following under Range:

•All to attach all the pages in the current whiteboard session (PDF or EWF2 format)

•Current to attach only the current whiteboard page

8. When you are ready to email the whiteboard pages, select Send.

Parent topic: Whiteboard Mode

Using BrightLink Without a Computer

You can use the pens and your fingers to write or draw on the projection surface simultaneously without

connecting a computer (PC Free annotation). This lets you annotate images from a document camera,

iPad, DVD player, or other source.

Note: A Touch Unit is optional for the BrightLink 1480Fi and must be installed for finger touch operation.

These two modes are available:

• Built-in annotation mode displays the built-in toolbar on whatever image is being projected from a

document camera, iPad, or other source.

• Built-in Whiteboard mode lets you project a white screen or one of 6 background patterns in 3 colors,

and use the toolbar to write or draw as you would on a chalkboard or dry erase board.

Using the Built-in Annotation Mode

Built-in Tools for Use Without a Computer

Controlling an Epson Document Camera

Parent topic: Using the Interactive Features

Using the Built-in Annotation Mode

You can use either pen with the built-in toolbar, both pens at the same time, your finger, or a combination

of both pen and finger touch.

Note: Make sure the Drawing Function setting is set to On in the projector's Interactive menu.

1. Make sure your device is connected and select the input source you want to display.

You see the toolbar at the bottom of the projected image.

2. To move the toolbar to the right, left, top, or bottom of the screen, use the pen or your finger to drag it

to the desired location.

263

3. Select the drawing tool you want to use from the toolbar and annotate the projected screen using the

interactive pens or your fingers.

4. To minimize the toolbar, select the Minimize icon on the right side of the toolbar.

Parent topic: Using BrightLink Without a Computer

Built-in Tools for Use Without a Computer

The built-in annotation toolbar is embedded in the projector and allows you to draw and write on the

projected screen. Make sure the PC Interactivity setting on the toolbar is disabled, if it appears.

Note: A mini toolbar also appears when you press the button on the interactive pen anywhere in the

drawing area. You can use the mini toolbar to switch the type of pen or eraser. You can change the

function of the button by changing the Pen Button Function setting in the Interactive menu.

Displays the Home screen.

Toggles the video and audio off and on.

Enlarges or reduces the projected image (not available when the screen is split into halves or

quarters).

Captures the current screen and copies it to the whiteboard.

Full Screen captures the entire screen.

Select Area lets you select a portion of the image to capture.

Note: If you want to capture the Screen Mirroring image, set Capture to Enabled in the

projector's Network >Network Settings >Network Projection menu.

Splits the screen and displays the whiteboard source with the current source (not available

when the screen is split into halves or quarters or when the Scale setting is on.).

Specifies the split screen settings (available only when you have split the screen into halves

or quarters).

Specifies the horizontal position of the image inside the ultra-wide display (available only

when Screen Type is set to 16:6 [BrightLink 1485Fi]).

264

Displays additional tools.

Mail: Shares the projected screen with an email recipient (set up the Mail settings in the

Interactive menu first).

Save: Saves the projected screen (set up the Save settings in the Interactive menu first).

Print: Prints the projected screen from a printer on the same network (set up the Print

settings in the Interactive menu first).

Timer: Counts the time up or down.

Volume: Adjusts the projector's volume.

Share Projection: Shares the current screen with devices connected using Epson

iProjection.

Participant List: Displays the user selection screen so you can project from devices

connected to the projector over a network.

Guidance: Displays the help screen for the toolbar functions. Select Close to close the

help screen.

Clear all drawing contents: Clears all current drawings and images and returns the

annotation mode to its default status.

Displays the available pen type, thickness, or shape.

(Yellow/Green/Aqua/Pink/Red/Blue for highlighter): Select the color for the

type of pen/shape from the options.

Switches to the eraser tool to erase content from the whiteboard. Select the size of the

eraser.

265

Selects all objects and images in a rectangular area. Specify the area by drawing on the

projection surface. You can also tap an object or image to select it.

• To cancel the current selection, tap an empty area on the board.

• Drag the edge of the area to enlarge or reduce the object or image.

• Drag the icon at the top of the area to rotate the selected object or image.

• To perform the following operations, select the icon at the bottom right of the selected

object or image:

• Duplicate

• Copy

• Paste (tap the location where you want to paste)

• Delete

Undoes the previous action.

Restores the action that was previously undone.

Clears all drawings from the displayed page.

Disables touch input temporarily to prevent unintended operation. Tap again to enable touch

operation.

Stops screen sharing (available only when projecting a shared image).

Toggles the PC Interactivity setting off and on. Set the PC Interactivity setting to On to

control the computer using the interactive pens and/or your fingers (not available when

projecting a shared image).

Hides the toolbar. Tap again to show the toolbar.

Follow these guidelines when using the annotation toolbar:

• To paste an image, you need to use the same pen that you used to cut or copy the image.

• Drawn objects are displayed at the front of the projected page.

• If objects or images are moved out of the projected screen, you may not be able to select them.

Parent topic: Using BrightLink Without a Computer

266

Controlling an Epson Document Camera

You can control certain document camera features from the projected toolbar when a compatible Epson

document camera is connected.

Note: A document camera toolbar is displayed only when an Epson DC-07, DC-13, or DC-21 document

camera is connected. You must connect the Epson DC-13 and DC-21 cameras via HDMI and the Epson

DC-07 camera via USB to control them from the projector toolbar.

1. Connect an Epson document camera to the projector.

Note: If you are connecting the document camera via HDMI cable, make sure HDMI Link is set to

On in the Signal I/O menu and disable PC Interactivity on the interactive toolbar.

You see a toolbar like this at the bottom of the projected image. You can select the following options

as available. Depending on your document camera model, options may vary.

1 Automatically focuses the image

2 Pauses the image

3 Enlarges the image

4 Rotates the image 180°

5 Captures the image and drawings

6 Records the image

7 Switches sources to the SD Card Viewer

267

2. To move the toolbar, use the pen or your finger to drag it to the desired location.

Note: A Touch Unit is optional for the BrightLink 1480Fi and must be installed for finger touch

operation.

3. To minimize or expand the toolbar, select the icon.

Parent topic: Using BrightLink Without a Computer

Related tasks

Connecting to a Document Camera

Splitting the Projected Image with Whiteboard Mode

When projecting from an input source in Annotation mode, you can split the screen and open a

whiteboard page to interact with simultaneously.

Note: This feature is not available when the screen is split into halves or quarters or the Scale setting

(BrightLink 1485Fi) is enabled.

1. Turn on the projector and project an image, if necessary.

2. Select the Whiteboard icon on the left side of the toolbar.

You see the whiteboard display on the screen.

268

3. To increase either the whiteboard or the projected image, drag the white part of the center divider to

the appropriate side.

Note: To enlarge either side to fit the entire screen, drag the white part of the center divider fully to

the desired edge of the screen.

4. To swap the projected image and whiteboard from left to right, select the at the bottom of the

center divider.

You cannot perform the following operations during split screen projection:

• E-Zoom

• Switching aspect mode

Parent topic: Using the Interactive Features

Sharing the Projected Screen

Follow the instructions in these sections to share the projected screen with other compatible projectors.

The screen sharing function is limited by the following:

• You can share the screen with projectors that support the screen sharing feature.

• If a firmware version amongst the projectors sharing the screen is not the same, you may need to

update the projector's firmware to share your screen.

• You cannot share images or content that are protected by HDCP.

• You cannot change the projector's Network settings while screen sharing.

Starting a Shared Screen Session

Parent topic: Using the Interactive Features

Starting a Shared Screen Session

You can share the projector's screen with up to 4 compatible projectors on the same network. Users can

interact with the shared screen from the connected projectors.

To use the Screen Sharing feature, the distributing and receiving projectors must be connected to the

same network and have the Screen Sharing setting enabled in the projector's Network menu. Other

requirements include the following:

• On the distributing projector: if you want to skip authentication of keywords for other projectors to

speed up connection, set the Connection Mode setting to Keyword Off in the projector's Network

menu.

269

1. Turn on the projector, if necessary.

2. Press the Home button on the remote control and select Screen Sharing on the Home screen.

3. Select the sharing option on the screen.

4. Enter the IP address of the projector you want to share your screen with and select Connect.

Note: You can also enter the projector keyword using the numeric keypad, if required, or select the

IP address of a projector you have previously connected to from the connection history list. The

projector keyword is displayed on the projected image of the receiving projector.

The projectors start connecting.

5. Enter the Projector Keyword if necessary.

When the connection is established, a connection status bar appears at the top of the distributing

projector's screen. Each receiving projector displays a message indicating that it cannot share the

image on the screen until the distributing projector selects an input source.

6. Repeat steps 4-5 to connect any remaining projectors.

7. Select the input source you want to display.

The projected screen is shared with the receiving projectors on their LAN input source.

8. To end screen sharing from the distributing projector, select the Stop Sharing icon in the status bar

at the top of the screen.

Note: To end screen sharing from the receiving projectors, select the Stop Sharing icon on the

toolbar.

You can also restrict drawing from receiving projectors. Press the Home button on the remote control

and select Screen Sharing. In the list of connected projectors, tap the projector you wish to restrict

drawing from and disable the drawing setting.

Parent topic: Sharing the Projected Screen

Using Interactive Features with Two Projectors (DuoLink)

You can use your projector's interactive features while projecting with two projectors installed side by

side (BrightLink 1485Fi). If you're using a Mac, download and install the software from the website to get

started.

See the online Edge Blending Setup Guide (available only in English) for additional information.

Parent topic: Using the Interactive Features

270

Adjusting the Menu Settings

Follow the instructions in these sections to access the projector menu system and change projector

settings.

Using the Projector's Menus

Image Quality Settings - Image Menu

Input Signal Settings - Signal I/O Menu

Installation Settings - Installation Menu

Display Settings - Display Menu

Feature Settings - Operation Menu

Administration Settings - Management Menu

Network Settings - Network Menu

Pen and Touch Setup Settings - Pen/Touch Menu

Interactive Settings - Interactive Menu

Multiple Projector Operation Settings - Multi-Projection Menu

Image Quality Memory Settings - Memory Menu

Setup Settings - ECO Menu

Initial Settings and Reset Options - Initial/All Settings Menu

Using the Projector's Menus

You can use the projector's menus to adjust the settings that control how your projector works. The

projector displays the menus on the screen.

1. Press the Menu button on the control panel or remote control.

271

You see the menu screen.

2. Press the up or down arrow button to move through the menus listed on the left. The settings for

each menu are displayed on the right.

Note: The available settings depend on the current input source, resolution, or other menu settings.

3. To change settings in the displayed menu, press Enter.

4. Press the up or down arrow button to move through the settings.

5. Change the settings using the buttons listed on the bottom of the menu screens.

6. To return all the menu settings to their default values, select the Initial/All Settings menu.

7. When you finish changing settings on a menu, press Esc.

8. Press Menu or Esc to exit the menus.

Note: The icon indicates that a setting contains sub-settings.

Note: You can also use the interactive pens or your finger to select menus and settings.

272

Parent topic: Adjusting the Menu Settings

Image Quality Settings - Image Menu

Settings on the Image menu let you adjust the quality of your image for the input source you are currently

using. The available settings depend on the currently selected color mode and input source.

Color Mode Settings

Setting Options Description

Color Mode See the list of available Color

Modes

Adjusts the vividness of image

colors for various image types

and environments

Brightness Varying levels available Lightens or darkens the overall

image

Contrast Varying levels available Adjusts the difference between

light and dark areas of the image

273

Setting Options Description

Color Saturation Varying levels available Adjusts the intensity of the image

colors

Tint Varying levels available Adjusts the balance of green to

magenta tones in the image

Sharpness Varying levels available Adjusts the sharpness or

softness of image details

White Balance Color Temp.

G-M Correction

Custom

Sets the overall color tone of the

image

Color Temp.: sets the color

temperature according to the

selected color mode; lower

values tint the image red, and

higher values tint the image blue

G-M Correction: makes fine

adjustments to the color tone;

higher values tint the image

green and lower values tint the

image red

Custom: adjusts the individual

RGB components of the offset

and gain

Dynamic Contrast Off

Normal

High Speed

Adjusts the projected luminance

based on the image brightness

274

Setting Options Description

Image Enhancement Image Preset Mode

Noise Reduction

MPEG Noise Reduction

Deinterlacing

Super-resolution

Detail Enhancement

Reset

Image Preset Mode: Saves the

Image Enhancement settings as

a preset

Noise Reduction: Reduces

flickering in analog images

MPEG Noise Reduction:

Reduces the noise or static in

MPEG video

Deinterlacing: Sets whether to

convert interlaced-to-progressive

signals for certain video image

types

Super-resolution: Sharpens

blurred images when projecting

low-resolution images

Detail Enhancement: Enhances

details to create clear outlines

Reset: Resets all Image

Enhancement settings to their

default values

Gamma –2 to 2

Custom

Adjusts the colors by selecting

one of the gamma correction

values or referring to a gamma

graph

RGBCMY Varying levels available Adjusts the hue, saturation, and

brightness for each color

Reset to Defaults — Resets all settings for the current

input source

Reset Image Settings — Resets all Image menu settings

to their default values

Note: The Brightness setting does not affect laser brightness. To change the laser brightness mode,

use the Light Source Brightness Control setting in the Operation menu.

275

Input Source Settings

To change settings for an input source, make sure the source is connected and select that source.

Note: You can restore the default settings of the Tracking,Sync, and Position settings by pressing the

Auto button on the remote control.

Setting Options Description

Source — Displays the current input source

selected

Resolution Auto

Normal

Wide

Sets the input signal resolution if

not detected automatically using

the Auto option

Aspect See the list of available aspect

ratios

Sets the aspect ratio (width-to-

height ratio)

Turn off the Scale setting or set

the Scale Mode setting to Full

Display before selecting this

setting (BrightLink 1485Fi).

Scale

(BrightLink 1485Fi)

Varying levels available When using multiple projectors,

adjusts the scale of the image

displayed by each projector

Analog Signal Adjustment Auto Setup

Tracking

Sync.

Position

Adjusts the signal when

Computer is the currently

selected input source

Auto Setup: set to On to

automatically optimize the image

quality

Tracking: adjusts the signal to

eliminate vertical stripes in

images

Sync: adjusts signal to eliminate

fuzziness or flickering in images

Position: adjusts the image

location on the screen

276

Setting Options Description

Reset to Defaults — Resets all settings for the

currently selected input source

Note: Select Reset Image Settings to reset all settings on the Image menu to their default values.

Parent topic: Adjusting the Menu Settings

Related concepts

Image Aspect Ratio

Related references

Feature Settings - Operation Menu

Related tasks

Changing the Color Mode

Turning On Dynamic Contrast

277

Input Signal Settings - Signal I/O Menu

Normally the projector detects and optimizes the input signal settings automatically. If you need to

customize the settings, you can use the Signal I/O menu. The available settings depend on the currently

selected input source.

To change settings for an input source, make sure the source is connected and select that source.

Setting Options Description

Volume Varying levels available Adjusts the volume of the projector's

speaker system or external speakers

278

Setting Options Description

Source Signal Format

Mic Input Level

Overscan

EDID

HDMI Out Intensity

Reset to Defaults

Signal Format: sets the signal type and

video range for certain input sources

•Video Signal: specifies the signal type

from video port input sources; if there is

interference or no image when set to

Auto, select the appropriate signal type

•Video Range: sets the video range to

match the setting of an HDMI or

HDBaseT (BrightLink 1485Fi) input

source

Mic Input Level: adjusts the microphone

volume when audio is not output to an a/v

system; when this setting is turned up, the

other connected device's volume is turned

down, and vice versa

Overscan: changes the projected image

ratio to make the edges visible by a set

percentage or automatically when projecting

a component signal

EDID: describes the display capabilities of

your projector when the selected input

source is HDMI or HDBaseT (BrightLink

1485Fi); change this setting as necessary

according to the current input source's

resolution; you can adjust settings for

individual input sources without changing

the input source

HDMI Out Intensity: adjusts the HDMI Out

port's signal intensity input; change this

setting when the image is not correctly

displayed from the HDMI Out port

Reset to Defaults: resets all settings for the

current input source

279

Setting Options Description

A/V Output While Projecting

Always On

Determines when the projector outputs

audio and images to external devices; set to

Always On to output audio and images

when the projector is not projecting any

images

Inverse Audio On

Off

Set to On to invert the audio's left and right

channels to match the projector's

installation position

Audio Output Auto

Audio

Audio1

Audio2

Sets the audio input port when projecting

from input sources other than HDMI,

HDBaseT (BrightLink 1485Fi), LAN, and

Screen Mirroring

HDMI Audio Output HDMI1

HDMI2

HDMI3

Sets the audio input port when projecting

from one of the HDMI ports

Monitor Out Port Monitor Out

Computer2

Selects the function of the

Computer2/Monitor Out port

Monitor Out: select this option when

outputting an image signal to an external

monitor

Computer2: select this option when

inputting an image signal from a computer

USB Display On

Off

Set to On to enable the USB Display feature

for a computer connected to the USB-B1

port

280

Setting Options Description

HDMI Link Device Connections

HDMI Link

Audio Out Device

Power On Link

Power Off Link

Adjusts the HDMI Link options that allow the

projector or remote to control HDMI-

connected devices that support the CEC

standard

Device Connections: lists the devices

connected to the HDMI1,HDMI2, and

HDMI3 ports

HDMI Link: enables or disables the HDMI

Link feature

Audio Out Device: selects whether to

output audio from the internal speakers or a

connected audio/visual system

Power On Link: controls what happens

when you turn on the projector or a linked

device

•Bidirectional: automatically turns on the

connected device when you turn on the

projector, and vice versa

•Device -> PJ: automatically turns on the

projector when you turn on the connected

device

•PJ -> Device: automatically turns on the

connected device when you turn on the

projector

Power Off Link: controls whether linked

devices are turned off when the projector is

turned off

HDMI EQ Setting 1

HDMI EQ Setting: adjusts the HDMI input

signal level depending on the devices

connected to the HDMI port; change the

setting if there is a lot of interference in the

image or if a problem, such as no projected

image, occurs (if no images are displayed

using a thumb-sized media streaming

device, select 1)

281

Setting Options Description

Reset Signal I/O Settings — Resets all settings on the Signal I/O menu

to their default values

Parent topic: Adjusting the Menu Settings

Installation Settings - Installation Menu

Settings on the Installation menu let you set up your projector for your installation environment. The

available settings depend on the currently selected input source and other settings.

Setting Options Description

Fixed Installation On

Off

Set to On if you installed the

projector in a fixed location

Test Pattern — Displays a test pattern to assist in

focusing and zooming the image

and correcting image shape

282

Setting Options Description

Setting Plate Installation Guide — Displays an on-screen guide to

assist with installing the

projection screen when you have

installed the projector on a wall

Vertical Installation Yes

Set to Yes if you installed the

projector in a vertical position

Projection Front

Rear

Front/Upside Down

Rear/Upside Down

Selects the way the projector

faces the screen so the image is

oriented correctly

Auto Screen Adjustment — Automatically adjusts the image

shape when corner markers are

placed on the projection surface

283

Setting Options Description

Geometry Correction H/V-Keystone

Quick Corner

Arc Correction

Point Correction

Memory

Adjusts image shape to

rectangular (horizontally and

vertically)

H/V Keystone: lets you manually

correct horizontal and vertical

sides

Quick Corner: select to correct

image shape and alignment

using an on-screen display

Arc Correction: select to adjust

the curve or arc of the horizontal

and vertical sides

Point Correction: select to

divide the projected image into a

grid and correct distortion by

moving a selected point

Memory: controls memory

functions for current image shape

settings

•Save Memory: saves the

current image shape as a

memory setting

•Load Memory: loads a saved

image shape memory

•Rename Memory: renames a

saved image shape memory

•Erase Memory: deletes a

saved image shape memory

•Reset Memory: resets all the

image shape memory settings

Digital Zoom Varying levels available Adjusts the size of the projected

image

284

Setting Options Description

Image Shift Varying positions available Adjusts the position of the

projected image

Connect ELPCB02 On

Off

Set to On to switch the input

source between the HDMI2 port

and HDMI3 port each time you

press the HDMI2 button on the

optional interface box

Touch Unit Installation Pattern

Power

Touch Unit Setup

Touch Calibration

Calibration Range

Installation Pattern: displays a

pattern to help you adjust the

position of the Touch Unit

Power: turns on the Touch Unit

power

Touch Unit Setup: performs

angle adjustment for laser

diffusion

Touch Calibration: performs

calibration for finger touch

operations

Calibration Range: if finger

touch operations are recognized

as drag operations, select Wide

to widen the calibration range

Remote Receiver Front/Rear

Front

Rear

Off

Limits reception of remote control

signals by the selected receiver;

Off turns off all receivers

Projector ID

(BrightLink 1480Fi)

Off

1 through 9

Assigns an ID for the projector

when you use multiple projectors

285

Setting Options Description

Screen Type 4:3

16:6 (BrightLink 1485Fi)

16:9

16:10

21:9

Sets the aspect ratio to fit the

image on the projection surface

Screen Position Varying positions available Shifts the image position on the

screen

High Altitude Mode On

Off

Regulates the projector's

operating temperature at

altitudes above 4921 feet (1500

Reset Installation Settings — Resets all settings on the

Installation menu to their default

values except for the following:

•Digital Zoom

•Image Shift

Parent topic: Adjusting the Menu Settings

Related tasks

Correcting Image Shape with Arc Correction

Correcting Image Shape with the Keystone Buttons

Correcting Image Shape with Quick Corner

Adjusting the Image Position

Locking the Projector's Buttons

Unlocking the Projector's Buttons

Related topics

Setting Up the Projector

286

Display Settings - Display Menu

Settings on the Display menu let you customize various projector display features. The available settings

depend on the currently selected input source and other settings.

Setting Options Description

Pattern Display — Displays the selected pattern

type to assist in adjusting the

image

Pattern Type Pattern 1

Pattern 2

Pattern 3

Pattern 4

User Pattern

Selects the type of grid pattern,

line pattern, or custom pattern to

display

287

Setting Options Description

No-signal Screen Black

Blue

Logo

Gradation

Select the screen color or logo to

display when no input signal is

detected

Startup Screen On

Off

Controls whether a logo is

displayed when the projector

starts up

Home Screen Auto Disp. On

Off

Controls whether the Home

screen is displayed automatically

when no input signal is detected

when the projector turns on

Sort Source Thumbnails On

Off

Selects whether or not to sort

sources on the Home screen by

signal detection

Messages On

Off

Controls whether projector status

and error messages are

displayed on the projected image

Menu Rotation Right 90 Degree

Left 90 Degree

Off

Rotates the menu display 90°

Menu Color Black

White

Sets the color theme of the Home

screen and projector menus

288

Setting Options Description

Split Screen Setting Display Audio Output Source

Align

Adjusts the Split Screen feature

Display Audio Output Source:

controls whether an icon is

displayed with the source

providing audio output during

Split Screen projection

Align: if splitting the screen

between two images, determines

whether the images are aligned

at the top or in the middle of the

screen

Reset Display Settings — Resets all settings on the Display

menu to their default values

Note: You must disable User's Logo password protection to adjust the No-signal Screen and Startup

Screen settings.

Parent topic: Adjusting the Menu Settings

Related tasks

Creating a User Pattern to Display

289

Feature Settings - Operation Menu

Settings on the Operation menu let you customize various projector features that control its operation.

The available settings depend on the currently selected input source and other settings.

Setting Options Description

Auto Source Search On

Off

Enables the projector to

automatically select an input

source

290

Setting Options Description

Light Source Brightness

Control

Maintain Brightness

Maintain Brightness Level

Estimated Remains

Light Source Mode

Brightness Level

Controls the constant brightness

of the projector's light source

Maintain Brightness: maintains

a constant brightness

Maintain Brightness Level:

selects the brightness level to

maintain when the Maintain

Brightness setting is enabled

Estimated Remains: if the

Maintain Brightness setting is

enabled, displays the remaining

number of hours the projector

can maintain constant brightness

Light Source Mode: selects the

brightness mode of the projector

when the Maintain Brightness

setting is disabled

•Normal: maximum brightness

•Quiet: 70% brightness with

reduced fan noise

•Extended: 70% brightness

and extends the life

expectancy of the light source

•Custom: select a custom

brightness level and enable

use of the next setting

Brightness Level: select the

Custom brightness level you

want

Direct Power On On

Off

Controls whether the projector

automatically turns on when you

plug it in

291

Setting Options Description

Auto Power On HDMI1

Computer1

USB Display

Off

Selects whether to automatically

turn on the projector when you

connect an input signal to a

specific input source

If you select HDMI1, set the

method for automatically turning

on the projector in the Power On

Trigger setting.

Power On Trigger Plug-in Detection

Signal Detection

Sets the way the projector turns

on when Auto Power On is set to

HDMI1.

Plug-in Detection: automatically

turns the projector on when it

detects a connected device is

turned on

Signal Detection: automatically

turns the projector on when an

HDMI signal is detected

Note: When Signal Detection is

selected, the power used in

standby mode increases.

Sleep Mode On

Off

Automatically turns off the

projector after an interval of

inactivity

Sleep Mode Timer 1 to 30 minutes Sets the time before the projector

automatically turns off (Sleep

Mode must be turned on)

A/V Mute Timer On

Off

Automatically turns off the

projector after 30 minutes of

inactivity

292

Setting Options Description

Standby Mode Communication On

Communication Off

Enable this setting to allow the

following operations to occur

when the projector is in standby

mode:

• Monitor and control the

projector over a network

• Output audio and video to an

external device (A/V Output

must be set to Always On)

Port Wired LAN

Wireless LAN

Selects the port to use while the

Standby Mode setting is set to

Communication On

Quick Startup 20min.

60min.

90min.

Off

Sets the time period for which

you want to be able to restart the

projector within five seconds of

turning it off (Quick Start mode).

Make sure to first set A/V Output

to While Projecting, Auto Power

On to Off, and Power On Trigger

to Plug-in Detection. It may take

longer than five seconds when

projecting from the projector's

USB or HDMI Out ports, when

using the Screen Mirroring

features, if whiteboard sharing

was ended in the previous

session, or if you want to restore

the whiteboard contents from the

previous session.

Closed Caption CC1

CC2

Off

Enables and selects the type of

closed captions to display

Indicators On

Off

Enables or disables the status

indicator lights on the projector

293

Setting Options Description

Inv Direction Button On

Off

Enable this setting if you want to

invert the direction of the arrow

buttons on the control panel to

match the projector's installation

position

Reset Operation Settings — Reset all settings on the

Operation menu to their default

values

Parent topic: Adjusting the Menu Settings

Related tasks

Turning On the Projector

Turning Off the Projector

Selecting a Quick Startup Setting

Administration Settings - Management Menu

Settings on the Management menu let you customize various projector administrative features.

294

Note: You must disable Schedule password protection to adjust the Schedule Settings settings.

Setting Options Description

User Button Light Source Mode

Information

Deinterlacing

Closed Caption

Resolution

Mic Input Level

Pattern Display

Auto Calibration

Display LAN Info.

Setting Plate Installation Guide

Assigns a menu option to the

User button on the remote

control for one-touch access

(Auto Calibration is the default

option)

User's Logo Start Setting

Reset

Creates the screen that the

projector displays to identify itself

and enhance security

User Pattern — Captures a projected screen and

saves it as a pattern for display;

select Pattern Display in the

Display menu to display the

saved pattern

Control Panel Lock Full Lock

Except for Power

Off

Controls projector button locking

to secure the projector

Full Lock: locks all buttons

Except for Power: locks all

buttons except the power button

Off: no buttons locked

295

Setting Options Description

Color Uniformity Color Uniformity

Adjustment Level

Start Adjustments

Reset

Adjusts the color tone balance

Color Uniformity: set to On to

adjust the color tone balance for

the whole screen

Adjustment Level: sets the

adjustment level

Start Adjustments: adjusts the

red, green, and blue color tones

individually for the selected area

Reset: resets all Color Uniformity

adjustment values to their

defaults

Color Matching

(BrightLink 1480Fi)

Adjustment Level

Red

Green

Blue

Brightness

Corrects the tint and brightness

differences between images

Refresh Mode Timer

Messages

Start

Select Start to clear an

afterimage that remains in the

projected image and turn off the

projector after the time specified

in the Timer screen. Press any

button to cancel Refresh Mode.

Enable the Messages setting if

you want to display a message

when Refresh Mode is in

progress.

296

Setting Options Description

Light Source Calibration Run Now

Run Periodically

Last Run

Selects options to perform light

source calibration to maintain the

color balance of the projected

image

Run Now: Select On to start light

source calibration now. Make

sure the projector has been

turned on for at least 30 minutes

for maximum accuracy. You may

not be able to start calibration if

the projector's environmental

temperature is out of range.

Run Periodically: Select On to

perform calibration every 100

hours of usage

Last Run: Displays the date and

time light source calibration was

last performed

Date & Time Date & Time

Daylight Saving Time

Internet Time

Adjusts the projector's date and

time settings

•Date & Time: sets the date

and time on the projector

•Daylight Saving Time:

enables daylight saving time

•Internet Time: updates the

time automatically via an

online time server

Schedule Settings — Schedules projector events to

occur automatically at selected

dates and times

Wireless LAN Power On

Off

Enables or disables wireless

communication

297

Setting Options Description

Wireless LAN Diagnosis Output

Ping

IP Address

Ping until stopped

Start

Displays the status of the

wireless LAN communication

Log Save Destination Internal Memory

USB and Internal Memory

Selects where you want to save

projector error and operation log

files

Batch Setup Range All

Limited

Selects which projector menu

settings to copy using the batch

setup feature; select All to copy

all the settings, or select Limited

to copy all settings except for the

following:

•Password Protection settings

•EDID setting in the Signal I/O

•Network menu settings

Language Various languages available Selects the language for

projector menu and message

displays

298

Setting Options Description

Information Operation Hours

Light Source Hours

Estimated Remains

Source

Input Signal

Resolution

Refresh Rate

Sync Info

Video Signal

HDBaseT Signal Level

(BrightLink 1485Fi)

Status

Serial Number

Event ID

Version

Displays information about the

projector and current input signal;

the displayed items vary

depending on the current input

source

The Version option displays

version numbers for the projector

and other components

Display Logs Temp Warning Info

Power On/Off History

Displays log data saved to the

location specified in the Log

Save Destination setting

Reset Management Settings — Resets all settings on the

Management menu to their

default values except for the

following:

•Schedule Settings

•Language

Event ID Code List

Parent topic: Adjusting the Menu Settings

Related tasks

Setting the Date and Time

Selecting the Language for the Projector Menus

299

Saving a Scheduled Event

Viewing Scheduled Events

Editing a Scheduled Event

Event ID Code List

If the Event ID option on the Information screen in the Management menu displays a code number,

check this list of Event ID codes for the solution to the projector problem associated with the code.

Event ID code Cause and solution

0026 A screen mirroring communication error has occurred. Turn the projector off and on

again, or restart the network software.

0032

0036

0037

0027 Unstable screen mirroring communication. Check the network communication

status, wait a few moments, and try connecting to the network again.

0028

0029

0030

0031

0035

0023 Connection failed. If you see the PIN entry screen on your computer, enter the PIN

code displayed on the network information screen or at the bottom right of the

projected image. If this does not solve the problem, restart the projector and the

connected devices, and then check the connection settings.

0024

0025

0043 The video format is not supported. Change the resolution of the mobile device and

reconnect. Alternatively, change the Adjust Image Quality setting for the projector

and reconnect.

0432 The network software did not start. Turn the projector off and then on again.

0435

0433 Cannot display the transferred images. Restart the network software.

300

Event ID code Cause and solution

0434 Unstable network communication. Check the network communication status, wait a

few moments, and try connecting to the network again.

0481

0482

0485

0483 The network software quit unexpectedly. Check the network communication status,

then turn the projector off and then on again.

04FE

0484 Communication with computer was disconnected. Restart the network software.

0479 A projector system error has occurred. Turn the projector off and then on again.

04FF

0891 Cannot find the SSID (network name). Make sure your computer and projector are

connected to your access point's current SSID.

0892 The WPA/WPA2/WPA3 authentication type does not match. Make sure the wireless

network security settings are correct.

0893 The WEP/TKIP/AES encryption type does not match. Make sure the wireless

network security settings are correct.

0894 Communication with unauthorized access point was disconnected. Contact your

network administrator.

0895 Communication with a connected device was disconnected. Check your device's

connection status.

0898 Failed to acquire DHCP address. Make sure the DHCP server is operating correctly.

If you are not using DHCP, turn off the DHCP setting in the Network menus.

0899 A communication error has occurred. Try restarting the network software and

restarting your projector. If that does not solve the problem, contact Epson for help.

089A The EAP authentication type does not match the network. Check the wireless LAN

security settings and make sure that the security certificate is installed correctly.

089B EAP server authentication failed. Check the wireless LAN security settings and

make sure that the security certificate is installed correctly.

089C EAP client authentication failed. Check the wireless LAN security settings and make

sure that the security certificate is installed correctly.

301

Event ID code Cause and solution

089D Key exchange failed. Check the wireless LAN security settings and make sure that

the security certificate is installed correctly.

0920 The internal battery that saves the projector's date and time settings is running low.

Contact Epson for help.

0B01 The internal storage could not be detected correctly. Turn off the projector and

disconnect the power cord, then reconnect the power cord and turn the projector

back on. When the projector is turned on, the security certificate and address book

are deleted. If that does not solve the problem, contact Epson for help.

0BFF An error has occurred in the whiteboard function. Restart the projector.

Parent topic: Administration Settings - Management Menu

Related references

Network Settings - Network Menu

Related tasks

Setting Up Wireless Network Security

302

Network Settings - Network Menu

Settings on the Network menu let you view network information and set up the projector for control over

a network.

Note: You must disable Network password protection to adjust the network settings.

303

Setting Options Description

Wireless LAN Info. Projector Name

Wireless LAN

Displays wireless network status and

details when the wireless LAN module

is installed or when the Simple AP

setting is disabled

The Wireless LAN option displays the

following:

•Antenna level

•SSID

•Channel

•DHCP

•IP Address

•Subnet Mask

•Gateway Address

•DNS Server 1

•DNS Server 2

•MAC Address

•Region Code

Wired LAN Info. Projector Name

DHCP

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Gateway Address

MAC Address

Displays wired network status and

details

304

Setting Options Description

Wired LAN Info. IPv6 IPv6 Address (Manual)

IPv6 Address (Auto)

Displays IPv6 information.

The IPv6 Address (Manual) option

displays the following:

•IPv6 Address

•Prefix Length

•Gateway Address

The IPv6 Address (Auto) option

displays the following:

•Temporary Address

•Link-local Address

•Stateless Address

•Stateful Address

Network Settings — Configures your network settings

Reset Network Settings — Resets all settings on the Network

menu to their default values

Parent topic: Adjusting the Menu Settings

Related concepts

Wireless Network Projection

Wired Network Projection

Related references

Wireless LAN Menu Settings

305

Pen and Touch Setup Settings - Pen/Touch Menu

Settings on the Pen/Touch menu let you set up the interactive pens and finger touch operations.

Setting Options Description

Auto Calibration

Manual Calibration

— Start calibration for the

interactive pens

306

Setting Options Description

Touch Unit Power

Touch Unit Setup

Touch Unit Adjustment Guide

Touch Calibration

Calibration Range

Select settings for the Touch Unit

Power: turns on the Touch Unit

power

Touch Unit Setup: performs

angle adjustment for laser

diffusion

Touch Unit Adjustment Guide

(BrightLink 1485Fi): when using

multiple projectors side by side,

displays a guide for adjusting the

adjacent projector's settings for

use with the touch unit (HDMI

Out Setting must be set to

Process Out)

Touch Calibration: performs

calibration for finger touch

operations

Calibration Range: if finger

touch operations are recognized

as drag operations, select Wide

to widen the calibration range

Installation of Projectors Infrared Intensity

Sync of Projectors

Select settings for interactive pen

and finger touch operations with

multiple projectors

Infrared Intensity: if the

interactive pens are unstable due

to infrared interference, select

Strong

Sync of Projectors: if the

projectors are connected using

the optional remote control cable

set, select Wired

307

Setting Options Description

Pen Hovering On

Off

Turns the pen hovering feature

on and off; when set to On, the

pointer follows the pen tip as you

hover it over the screen and

move it around

PC Interactivity Pen Tracking Mode

Press and Hold

Pen Tip Behavior

USB-B2

Auto Adjust Pen Area

Manual Adj. Pen Area

Select pen operation and

adjustment options

Pen Tracking Mode: sets the

correct operating system for the

interactive pen features. For

Windows or Mac, select Pen

Mode. For Ubuntu, select Mouse

Mode.

Press and Hold: when set to

Right Click, lets you use a long

pen press or finger press as a

right-click operation

Pen Tip Behavior: assigns

either Right Click or Left Click

to the pen tip

USB-B2: sets the HDMI port

used for the computer connected

to the USB-B2 when using

interactive features with the

computer

Auto Adjust Pen Area:

automatically adjusts the pen

area as the resolution for the

connected computer image

changes

Manual Adj. Pen Area: lets you

adjust the pen area manually

(only displayed when PC

Interactivity is enabled)

308

Setting Options Description

Reset Pen/Touch Settings — Resets all settings on the

Pen/Touch menu to their default

values

Parent topic: Adjusting the Menu Settings

Related concepts

Pen Calibration

Related tasks

Calibrating for Finger Touch Interactivity

Related topics

Using the Interactive Features

Interactive Settings - Interactive Menu

Settings on the Interactive menu let you customize various projector interactive features.

309

Note: You must disable Interactive password protection to adjust the interactive settings.

Setting Options Description

Drawing Function On

Off

Enables or disables features for

drawing on the projected image

Display Toolbars Always Show

Hide for Set Time

Controls when the interactive

toolbar is displayed

Toolbar Color Black

White

Sets the interactive toolbar color

Display Drawing Area On

Off

Displays or hides the drawing

area

Confirm Clear Screen On

Off

Displays a confirmation screen

before clearing all content drawn

on the projected image

Pen Button Function Drawing Toolbar

Eraser

Clear Screen

Off

Sets the function of the button on

the side of the interactive pens

Display Clock Date&Time

Date

Time

Off

Sets the date and time display on

the whiteboard toolbar; adjust the

Date & Time setting in the

Management menu

Date YYYY-MM-DD

YYYY/MM/DD

MM/DD/YYYY

DD/MM/YYYY

Sets the format of the date

Print — Adjusts settings that control

whiteboard printing

310

Setting Options Description

Save — Adjusts settings that control file

saving of whiteboard content

Mail — Adjusts settings that control

email transmission of whiteboard

content

Directory — Adjusts settings that control

directory services to search for

email addresses

Reset Interactive Settings — Resets all settings on the

Interactive menu to their default

values

Parent topic: Adjusting the Menu Settings

Related tasks

Saving Pages in Whiteboard Mode

Printing Whiteboard Pages

Emailing Whiteboard Pages

Using the Pens

Creating an Address Book

Related topics

Using the Interactive Features

311

Multiple Projector Operation Settings - Multi-Projection Menu

Settings on the Multi-Projection menu let you set up multiple projectors to project a single unified image

(BrightLink 1485Fi).

Setting Options Description

Projector ID Off

1 through 9

Assigns an ID for the projector

when you use multiple projectors

HDMI Out Setting Pass Through

Process Out

Off

Set to Pass Through to enable

up to four projectors connected

via HDMI cables to project a

unified image.

Set to Process Out to enable

use of interactive pens or finger

touch operations for up to two

projectors.

312

Setting Options Description

Number of Projectors 2 to 4 Sets the number of projectors

used to create a unified image;

this setting is displayed only if

HDMI Out Setting is set to Pass

Through

Order 1 to 4 (when HDMI Out Setting

is set to Pass Through)

1 or 2 (when HDMI Out Setting

is set to Process Out)

Sets the projector's position in

numbered order from left to right

Connect Computer Yes

Set to Yes if you connected a

computer to the projector; this

setting is displayed only if HDMI

Out Setting is set to Process

Out

313

Setting Options Description

Geometry Correction H/V-Keystone

Quick Corner

Arc Correction

Point Correction

Memory

Adjusts image shape to

rectangular (horizontally and

vertically)

H/V Keystone: lets you manually

correct horizontal and vertical

sides

Quick Corner: select to correct

image shape and alignment

using an on-screen display

Arc Correction: select to adjust

the curve or arc of the horizontal

and vertical sides

Point Correction: select to

divide the projected image into a

grid and correct distortion by

moving a selected point

Memory: controls memory

functions for current image shape

settings

•Save Memory: saves the

current image shape as a

memory setting

•Load Memory: loads a saved

image shape memory

•Rename Memory: renames a

saved image shape memory

•Erase Memory: deletes a

saved image shape memory

•Reset Memory: resets all the

image shape memory settings

314

Setting Options Description

Edge Blending Edge Blending

Top Edge

Bottom Edge

Left Edge

Right Edge

Line Guide

Pattern Guide

Guide Color

Blends the border between

multiple images to create a

seamless screen

Black Level Color Adjustment

Area Correction

Reset

Adjusts the brightness and tone

differences in overlapping

images

Scale Varying levels available When using multiple projectors,

adjusts the scale of the image

displayed by each projector

Color Uniformity Color Uniformity

Adjustment Level

Start Adjustments

Reset

Adjusts the color tone balance

Color Uniformity: set to On to

adjust the color tone balance for

the whole screen

Adjustment Level: sets the

adjustment level

Start Adjustments: adjusts the

red, green, and blue color tones

individually for the selected area

Reset: resets all Color Uniformity

adjustment values to their

defaults

315

Setting Options Description

Light Source Mode Normal

Quiet

Extended

Custom

Selects the brightness mode of

the projector when the Maintain

Brightness setting is disabled

Normal: maximum brightness

Quiet: 70% brightness with

reduced fan noise

Extended: 70% brightness and

extends the life expectancy of the

light source

Custom: select a custom

brightness level and enable use

of the next setting

Color Matching Adjustment Level

Red

Green

Blue

Brightness

Corrects the tint and brightness

differences between images

RGBCMY Varying levels available Adjusts the hue, saturation, and

brightness for each color

Reset Multi-Projection Settings — Resets all settings on the Multi-

Projection menu to their default

values

Parent topic: Adjusting the Menu Settings

Related concepts

Using Multiple Projectors (DuoLink)

Related references

Multiple Projector Connection Menu Settings

Related tasks

Blending the Image Edges

Adjusting Color Uniformity

316

Matching the Image Colors

Adjusting the Black Level

Adjusting RGBCMY

Scaling an Image

Image Quality Memory Settings - Memory Menu

Settings on the Memory menu let you save and load image quality settings in the projector's memory.

Setting Options Description

Save Memory Memory 1 to 10 Lets you save the current image

quality settings to memory

Load Memory Memory 1 to 10 Loads a saved image quality

setting memory

Rename Memory Memory 1 to 10 Renames a saved image quality

setting memory

317

Setting Options Description

Erase Memory Memory 1 to 10 Deletes a saved image quality

setting memory

Reset Memory — Resets all the image quality

setting memory settings

Parent topic: Adjusting the Menu Settings

Related tasks

Saving Settings to Memory and Using Saved Settings

Setup Settings - ECO Menu

Settings on the ECO menu let you customize projector functions to save power.

318

Setting Options Description

Light Source Mode Normal

Quiet

Extended

Custom

Selects the brightness mode of

the projector when the Maintain

Brightness setting is disabled

Normal: maximum brightness

Quiet: 70% brightness with

reduced fan noise

Extended: 70% brightness and

extends the life expectancy of the

light source

Custom: select a custom

brightness level and enable use

of the next setting

Sleep Mode On

Off

Automatically turns off the

projector after an interval of

inactivity

Sleep Mode Timer 1 to 30 minutes Sets the interval for Sleep mode

A/V Mute Timer On

Off

Automatically turns off the

projector after 30 minutes if A/V

Mute is enabled

Standby Mode Communication On

Communication Off

Enable this setting to allow the

following operations to occur

when the projector is in standby

mode:

• Monitor and control the

projector over a network

• Output audio and video to an

external device (A/V Output

must be set to Always On)

Parent topic: Adjusting the Menu Settings

Related references

Projector Light Source Specifications

319

Initial Settings and Reset Options - Initial/All Settings Menu

You can reset most of the projector settings to their default values using the Reset All option on the

Intial/All Settings menu.

When you select the Reset All option, you see this screen:

Checkmarks appear next to the menu settings that are selected to be reset. If you do not want to reset

settings in some menus, deselect them. When you are ready, select Execute and press Enter.

320

You cannot reset the following settings using the Reset All option:

• Digital Zoom

• Image Shift

• Schedule Settings

• User Pattern

• Language

Note: The Network and Interactive menu settings do not reset if Menu Protection is enabled.

Parent topic: Adjusting the Menu Settings

321

Maintaining and Transporting the Projector

Follow the instructions in these sections to maintain your projector and transport it from place to place.

Projector Maintenance

Air Filter and Vent Maintenance

Replacing the Remote Control Batteries

Replacing the Hard Pen Tips

Replacing the Soft Pen Tips

Updating the Firmware

Transporting the Projector

Projector Maintenance

Your projector needs little maintenance to keep working at its best.

You may need to clean the lens periodically, and clean the air filter and air vents to prevent the projector

from overheating due to blocked ventilation.

The only parts you should replace are the air filter, pen batteries and tips, and remote control batteries. If

any other part needs replacing, contact Epson or an authorized Epson servicer.

This projector uses a sealed laser light source which does not need servicing and cannot be replaced.

Warning: Before cleaning any part of the projector, turn it off and unplug the power cord. Never open

any cover on the projector, except as specifically explained in this manual. Dangerous electrical voltages

in the projector can injure you severely.

Warning: Do not try to service this product yourself, except as specifically explained in this manual.

Refer all other servicing to qualified servicers.

Cleaning the Lens

Cleaning the Projector Case

Parent topic: Maintaining and Transporting the Projector

Cleaning the Lens

Clean the projector's lens periodically, or whenever you notice dust or smudges on the surface. Make

sure you unplug the projector before cleaning the lens.

322

• To remove dust or smudges, gently wipe the lens with lens-cleaning paper.

• To remove stubborn smudges, moisten a soft, lint-free cloth with lens cleaner and gently wipe the

lens. Do not spray any liquid directly on the lens.

Warning: Do not use a lens cleaner that contains flammable gas. The high heat generated by the

projector may cause a fire.

Caution: Do not use glass cleaner or any harsh materials to clean the lens and do not subject the lens

to any impacts; you may damage it. Do not use canned air, or the gases may leave a residue. Avoid

touching the lens with your bare hands to prevent fingerprints on or damage to the lens surface.

Parent topic: Projector Maintenance

Related tasks

Turning Off the Projector

Cleaning the Projector Case

Before cleaning the projector case, turn off the projector and unplug the power cord.

• To remove dust or dirt, use a soft, dry, lint-free cloth.

• To remove stubborn dirt, use a soft cloth moistened with water and mild soap. Do not spray liquid

directly on the projector.

Caution: Do not use wax, alcohol, benzine, paint thinner, or other chemicals to clean the projector

case. These can damage the case. Do not use canned air, or the gases may leave a flammable

residue.

Parent topic: Projector Maintenance

Related tasks

Turning Off the Projector

Air Filter and Vent Maintenance

Regular filter maintenance is important to maintaining your projector. Your Epson projector is designed

with an easily accessible, user-replaceable filter to protect your projector and make regular maintenance

simple. Filter maintenance intervals will depend on the environment.

323

If regular maintenance is not performed, your Epson projector will notify you when the temperature

inside the projector has reached a high level. Do not wait until this warning appears to maintain your

projector filter as prolonged exposure to high temperatures may reduce the life of your projector or laser.

Damage due to the failure to properly maintain the projector or its filter may not be covered by the

projector's Limited Warranty.

Cleaning the Air Filter and Vents

Replacing the Air Filter

Parent topic: Maintaining and Transporting the Projector

Related references

Projector Light Source Specifications

Cleaning the Air Filter and Vents

Clean the projector's air filter or vents if they get dusty, or if you see a message telling you to clean them.

Caution: Do not use water or any detergent to clean the air filter. Do not use canned air, or the gases

may leave a flammable residue.

1. Turn off the projector and unplug the power cord.

2. Loosen the screws securing the air filter cover.

324

3. Open the air filter cover.

4. Pull the air filter out of the projector.

325

5. Tap each side of the filter 4 to 5 times to shake off any excess dust. Do this outside the room or

away from the projector.

Caution: Do not use excessive force when tapping the air filter, or it may crack and become

unusable. Do not rinse the air filter in water, or use any detergent or solvent to clean it. Do not use

canned air; the gases may leave a flammable residue, or push dust and debris into the projector's

optics or other sensitive areas.

6. Vacuum the front of the air filter (the side with the tabs) to remove any remaining dust.

326

Note: If dust is difficult to remove or the air filter is damaged, replace the air filter.

7. Place the air filter back in the projector as shown.

8. Close the air filter cover and tighten the screws.

Parent topic: Air Filter and Vent Maintenance

Related tasks

Turning Off the Projector

327

Replacing the Air Filter

You need to replace the air filter in the following situations:

• After cleaning the air filter, you see a message telling you to clean or replace it

• The air filter is torn or damaged

You can replace the air filter while the projector is mounted on the wall or ceiling.

1. Turn off the projector and unplug the power cord.

2. Loosen the screws securing the air filter cover.

3. Open the air filter cover.

328

4. Pull the air filter out of the projector.

Note: Air filters contain polypropylene. Dispose of used air filters according to local regulations.

5. Place the new air filter in the projector as shown.

329

6. Close the air filter cover and tighten the screws.

Parent topic: Air Filter and Vent Maintenance

Related tasks

Turning Off the Projector

Replacing the Remote Control Batteries

The remote control uses two AA manganese or alkaline batteries. Replace the batteries as soon as they

run out.

Caution: Use only the type of batteries specified in this manual. Do not install batteries of different types,

or mix new and old batteries.

1. Remove the battery cover as shown.

330

2. Remove the old batteries.

Warning: If the battery fluid has leaked, wipe it away with a soft cloth and avoid getting the fluid on

your hands. If it gets on your hands, wash them immediately to avoid injury.

3. Insert the batteries with the +and –ends facing as shown.

Warning: Make sure the batteries are inserted in the correct positions. If the batteries are not

inserted correctly, they could explode or leak, causing a fire, injury, or damage to the product.

4. Replace the battery cover and press it down until it clicks into place.

331

Warning: Dispose of used batteries according to local regulations. Do not expose batteries to heat

or flame. Keep batteries out of the reach of children; they are choking hazards and are very

dangerous if swallowed.

Parent topic: Maintaining and Transporting the Projector

Replacing the Hard Pen Tips

If the pen tips become damaged or no longer work correctly, you can replace them.

Note: If you are using an ultra-wide display screen with an aspect ratio of 16:6, use only the hard pen tip

(BrightLink 1485Fi).

1. Twist off the tip of the pen to remove it.

332

2. Twist on the new tip.

Parent topic: Maintaining and Transporting the Projector

Replacing the Soft Pen Tips

If the pen tips become damaged or no longer work correctly, you can replace them. If the soft tip is

difficult to use on a textured surface, replace it with the hard pen tip.

Note: If you are using an ultra-wide display screen with an aspect ratio of 16:6, use only the hard pen tip

(BrightLink 1485Fi).

333

1. Twist off the tip of the pen to remove it.

2. Remove the soft tip.

334

3. Insert the new tip.

4. Twist on the pen tip.

Parent topic: Maintaining and Transporting the Projector

335

Updating the Firmware

You can update the projector's firmware using a USB storage device or a computer and a USB cable.

If a firmware update is available for your product, you can select the Firmware Update option in the

projector's Initial/All Settings menu. The projector enters firmware update mode and is ready to perform

a firmware update. If a firmware update file is not found, the projector enters standby mode.

You can contact Epson Support or use the Epson Projector Management software to check for firmware

updates for your product. For more information, contact Epson Support.

Parent topic: Maintaining and Transporting the Projector

Transporting the Projector

The projector contains precision parts, some of which are glass. Follow the guidelines here to transport,

ship, or store the projector safely.

1. Remove any equipment connected to the projector.

2. Turn off the projector.

3. Make sure the power light is blue (but not flashing) and the status light is off, then unplug the

power cord.

4. Attach the lens cap.

5. Do one of the following:

• When transporting the projector a long distance or as checked luggage, pack it in a firm box with

cushioning around it and mark the box "Fragile."

• When shipping the projector for repairs, place it in its original packing materials, if possible, or use

equivalent materials with cushioning around the projector. Mark the box "Fragile."

Note: Epson shall not be liable for any damages incurred during transportation.

Parent topic: Maintaining and Transporting the Projector

336

Solving Problems

Check the solutions in these sections if you have any problems using the projector.

Projection Problem Tips

Projector Light Status

Using the Projector Menu Displays

Solving Image or Sound Problems

Solving Projector or Remote Control Operation Problems

Solving Network Problems

Solving Interactive Problems

Where to Get Help (U.S. and Canada)

Projection Problem Tips

If the projector is not working properly, try turning it off and unplugging it. Then plug it back in and turn it

on.

If this does not solve the problem, check the following:

• The lights on the projector may indicate what the problem is.

• The solutions in this manual can help you solve many problems.

If none of these solutions help, you can contact Epson for technical support.

Parent topic: Solving Problems

Related references

Where to Get Help (U.S. and Canada)

Projector Light Status

Related tasks

Cleaning the Lens

Turning On the Projector

Turning Off the Projector

Cleaning the Air Filter and Vents

Replacing the Air Filter

337

Projector Light Status

The lights on the projector indicate the projector status and let you know when a problem occurs. Check

the status and color of the lights and look for a solution in the table here.

Note: If the Indicators setting in the Operation menu is Off, all lights are off under normal projection

conditions.

1 Power light

2 Status light

3 Laser light

4 Temp (temperature) light

5 Wireless LAN light

338

Power light Status light Laser light Temp light Status and solution

Blue Blue Off Off Normal operation.

Blue Flashing blue Off Off Warming up. Wait for an image to

appear.

Shutting down. (When the Status light

stops flashing, you can unplug the

projector.)

Blue Off Off Off In standby, sleep mode, or

monitoring.

Flashing blue Off Off Off Preparing for monitoring or quick

startup mode; all features are

disabled.

Flashing blue Varies Varies Flashing

orange

Projector is too hot.

• Make sure that the vents and air

filter are not clogged with dust or

obstructed by nearby objects.

• Clean or replace the air filter.

• Make sure the environmental

temperature is not too hot.

339

Power light Status light Laser light Temp light Status and solution

Off Flashing blue Off Orange Projector has overheated and turned

off. Leave it turned off to cool down.

After about five minutes, do the

following:

• Make sure that the vents and air

filter are not clogged with dust or

obstructed by nearby objects.

• Make sure the environmental

temperature is not too hot.

• Clean or replace the air filter.

• If operating the projector at high

altitude, turn on High Altitude

Mode.

• If the problem persists, unplug the

projector and contact Epson for

help.

Flashing blue Varies Flashing

orange

Varies Laser warning. Turn the projector off,

unplug it, and contact Epson for help.

Off Flashing blue Orange Off Laser has a problem. Turn the

projector off, unplug it, and contact

Epson for help.

Off Flashing blue Off Flashing

orange

A fan or sensor has a problem. Turn

the projector off, unplug it, and

contact Epson for help.

Off Flashing blue Flashing

orange

Off Internal projector error. Turn the

projector off, unplug it, and contact

Epson for help.

Varies Flashing blue Flashing

orange

Varies Refresh Mode is in progress.

340

Power light Status light Laser light Temp light Status and solution

Varies Varies Fast

flashing

orange

Fast flashing

orange

The batch setup file is corrupt or the

USB flash drive is connected

incorrectly. Disconnect the USB flash

drive and turn off the projector.

Unplug the projector, plug it in again,

and try again.

Fast flashing

blue

Fast flashing

blue

Fast

flashing

orange

Fast flashing

orange

Writing the menu settings has failed

and an error in the projector's

firmware has occurred. Turn the

projector off, unplug it, and contact

Epson for help.

Wireless LAN Light Status

The Wireless LAN light indicates the following:

•Blue: Wireless LAN is available and operating normally

•Flashing blue (quickly): Connecting to a device

•Flashing blue (slowly): An error has occurred. Turn off the projector and restart it

•Off: Wireless LAN is not available. Make sure the Wireless LAN Power setting is set to On in the

projector's Management menu

Note: If the lights display a pattern not listed in the tables above, turn the projector off, unplug it, and

contact Epson for help.

Parent topic: Solving Problems

Related references

Where to Get Help (U.S. and Canada)

Feature Settings - Operation Menu

Administration Settings - Management Menu

Using the Projector Menu Displays

The projector displays descriptions in the menu system to help you navigate the projector's settings. The

descriptions appear on the right side of the screen as you scroll the menu settings.

Parent topic: Solving Problems

341

Solving Image or Sound Problems

Check the solutions in these sections if you have any problems with projected images or sound.

Solutions When No Image Appears

Solutions When Image is Incorrect Using the USB Display Function

Solutions When "No Signal" Message Appears

Solutions When "Not Supported" Message Appears

Solutions When Only a Partial Image Appears

Solutions When the Image is Not Rectangular

Solutions When the Image Contains Noise or Static

Solutions When the Image is Fuzzy or Blurry

Solutions When the Image Brightness or Colors are Incorrect

Solutions When an Afterimage Remains On the Projected Image

Solutions to Sound Problems

Solutions to Microphone Problems

Parent topic: Solving Problems

Solutions When No Image Appears

If no image appears, try the following solutions:

• Make sure the lens cap is off.

• Press the A/V Mute button on the remote control to see if the image was temporarily turned off.

• Make sure all necessary cables are securely connected and the power is on for the projector and

connected video sources.

• If you connected your video source to the Computer2/Monitor Out port, make sure you set the

Monitor Out Port setting to Computer2.

• Make sure the image being projected is not completely black (only when projecting computer images).

• Press the projector's power button to wake it from standby or sleep mode. Also see if your connected

computer is in sleep mode or displaying a blank screen saver.

• Press the Menu button. If the projector menu displays, there may be a problem with the connected

video source, cable connection, or port.

• Adjust the Brightness setting on the Image menu.

• Adjust the brightness of your projector's light source.

342

• Check the Display menu to make sure the Messages setting is set to On.

• If the projector does not respond when you press the control panel buttons, the buttons may be

locked. Unlock the buttons.

• If the projector does not respond when you press buttons on the remote control, make sure the remote

receivers are turned on.

• For images projected with Windows Media Center, reduce the screen size from full screen mode.

• For images projected from applications using Windows DirectX, turn off DirectX functions.

• The projector may not be able to project copyrighted videos that you play back on a computer. For

details, see the manual supplied with your computer.

• If you cannot project a screen mirroring image, make sure the Capture setting is disabled.

• If the other solutions do not solve the problem, reset all of the projector settings using the options on

the Reset menu.

Parent topic: Solving Image or Sound Problems

Related references

Display Settings - Display Menu

Setup Settings - ECO Menu

Installation Settings - Installation Menu

Input Signal Settings - Signal I/O Menu

Image Quality Settings - Image Menu

Related tasks

Selecting an Image Source

Unlocking the Projector's Buttons

Shutting Off the Picture and Sound Temporarily

Selecting Screen Mirroring Settings

Solutions When Image is Incorrect Using the USB Display Function

If no image appears or if the image appears incorrectly using the USB Display function, try the following

solutions:

• Press the USB button on the remote control.

• Press the Source Search button on the remote control or control panel, and select USB Display.

• Make sure the USB Display software has installed correctly. Install it manually if necessary.

• Make sure your computer is connected to the USB-B1 port on the projector.

343

• Make sure the USB Display setting is set to On in the projector's Signal I/O menu.

• On a Mac, select the USB Display icon in the Dock or from the Applications folder. If you select Exit

from the USB Display icon menu in the Dock, USB Display does not start automatically when you

connect the USB cable.

• For images projected with Windows Media Center, reduce the screen size from full screen mode.

• For images projected from applications using Windows DirectX, turn off DirectX functions.

• If the mouse cursor flickers, select Make the movement of the mouse pointer smooth in the Epson

USB Display Settings program on your Windows computer.

• Turn off the Transfer layered window setting in the Epson USB Display Settings program on your

Windows computer.

• If you change the computer resolution during projection, the video quality and performance may

decline.

• Make sure you are using the most recent version of the USB Display software. You can download the

latest version from the Epson web site. Go to epson.com/support (U.S.) or epson.ca/support (Canada)

and select your projector.

Parent topic: Solving Image or Sound Problems

Related references

Input Signal Settings - Signal I/O Menu

Related tasks

Selecting an Image Source

Connecting to a Computer for USB Video and Audio

Solutions When "No Signal" Message Appears

If the "No Signal" message appears, try the following solutions:

• Press the Source Search button and wait a few seconds for an image to appear.

• Turn on the connected computer or video source, and press its play button to begin your presentation,

if necessary.

• Check the connection from the projector to your video sources.

• If you are projecting from a laptop computer, make sure it is set up to display on an external monitor.

• If necessary, turn the projector and the connected computer or video source off and then on again.

• If you are projecting from an HDMI source, change the HDMI EQ Setting setting in the projector's

Signal I/O menu.

344

• If you are projecting using a thumb-sized media streaming device, set the HDMI EQ Setting to 1in the

projector's Signal I/O menu.

• If you are projecting from an HDMI source, replace the HDMI cable with a shorter one.

• Connect the video source directly to the projector.

• Try a different video cable.

• If the other solutions do not solve the problem, reset all of the projector settings using the options on

the Reset menu.

Displaying From a PC Laptop

Displaying From a Mac Laptop

Parent topic: Solving Image or Sound Problems

Related tasks

Selecting an Image Source

Connecting to an External Computer Monitor

Related topics

Connecting to Computer Sources

Connecting to Video Sources

Displaying From a PC Laptop

If you see the "No Signal" message when you display from a PC laptop, you need to set up the laptop to

display on an external monitor.

1. Hold down the laptop's Fn key and press the key labeled with a monitor icon or CRT/LCD. (See your

laptop manual for details.) Wait a few seconds for an image to appear. To display on both the

laptop's monitor and the projector, try pressing the same keys again.

Note: On Windows 7 or later, hold down the Windows key and press Pat the same time, then click

Duplicate.

2. If the same image is not displayed by the laptop and projector, check the Windows Display utility to

make sure the external monitor port is enabled and extended desktop mode is disabled. (See your

computer or Windows manual for instructions.)

3. If necessary, check your video card settings and set the multiple display option to Clone,Mirror, or

Duplicate.

Parent topic: Solutions When "No Signal" Message Appears

345

Displaying From a Mac Laptop

If you see the "No Signal" message when you display from a Mac laptop, you need to set up the laptop

for mirrored display. (See your laptop manual for details.)

1. Open the System Preferences utility and select Displays,Display, or Color LCD.

2. Click the Arrange or Arrangement tab.

3. Select the Mirror Displays checkbox.

Parent topic: Solutions When "No Signal" Message Appears

Solutions When "Not Supported" Message Appears

If the "Not Supported" message appears, try the following solutions:

• Make sure the correct input signal is selected on the Signal I/O menu.

• Make sure the computer's display resolution does not exceed the projector's resolution and frequency

limit. If necessary, select a different display resolution for your computer. (See your computer manual

for details.)

Parent topic: Solving Image or Sound Problems

Related references

Input Signal Settings - Signal I/O Menu

Solutions When Only a Partial Image Appears

If only a partial computer image appears, try the following solutions:

• For VGA connections, press the Auto button on the remote control to optimize the image signal.

• Make sure you selected the correct Screen Type setting in the projector's Installation menu for the

screen you are using. If there are margins between the edge of the image and the projected screen

frame, use the Screen Position setting to adjust the position of the image.

• Make sure the Scale setting in the Image menu is turned off (BrightLink 1485Fi).

• Make sure the Resolution setting in the Image menu is set correctly for the input signal.

• Try adjusting the image position using the Position setting in the Image menu.

• When using the interactive features with an aspect ratio of 16:6, set the Screen Position to a

vertically centered or higher position.

• Press the Aspect button on the remote control to select a different image aspect ratio.

• Check the Blanking setting in the Installation menu.

346

• If you zoomed into or out of the image using the E-Zoom buttons, press the Esc button until the

projector returns to a full display.

• Check your computer display settings to disable dual display and set the resolution within the

projector's limits. (See your computer manual for details.)

• Check the resolution assigned to your presentation files to see if they are created for a different

resolution than you are projecting in. (See your software help for details.)

• Make sure you selected the correct Projection setting in the Installation menu.

• Try adjusting the image position using the Image Shift setting.

• If the image is not projected correctly when using multiple projectors, set the Screen Type setting in

the Installation menu to 16:9.

• If you see black bands in the projected screen when using multiple projectors, set EDID to

3240x1080/60Hz and Blend Range to 600 for both projectors.

Note: If you cannot select 600 as the Blend Range setting, select a lower setting. Black bands may

appear on the side of the projected screen.

Parent topic: Solving Image or Sound Problems

Related references

Multiple Projector Operation Settings - Multi-Projection Menu

Input Signal Settings - Signal I/O Menu

Installation Settings - Installation Menu

Image Quality Settings - Image Menu

Related tasks

Changing the Image Aspect Ratio

Zooming Into and Out of Images

Solutions When the Image is Not Rectangular

If the projected image is not evenly rectangular, try the following solutions:

• If the projector is not mounted on the wall or ceiling, place it directly in front of the screen, lining up the

lens with the center of the screen, if possible.

• Use the Image Shift setting to adjust the image position, rather than moving the projector.

• Press the keystone buttons on the projector to adjust the image shape.

• Adjust the image shape using the individual Geometry Correction settings in the Installation menu.

347

Note: Adjusting Quick Corner,H/V-Keystone, and Arc Correction settings may affect focus and

pen calibration.

Note: If the projector is mounted on the wall, always use the adjustment dials on the mount to center

the image.

Parent topic: Solving Image or Sound Problems

Related references

Installation Settings - Installation Menu

Image Quality Settings - Image Menu

Related tasks

Correcting Image Shape with Arc Correction

Correcting Image Shape with the Keystone Buttons

Correcting Image Shape with Quick Corner

Solutions When the Image Contains Noise or Static

If the projected image seems to contain electronic interference (noise) or static, try the following

solutions:

• Check the cables connecting your computer or video source to the projector. They should be:

• Separated from the power cord to prevent interference

• Securely connected at both ends

• Not connected to an extension cable

• Make sure you selected the correct Signal Format or EDID settings in the projector's Signal I/O

menu, if available for your image source.

• Adjust the Noise Reduction,MPEG Noise Reduction, and Deinterlacing settings in the projector's

Image menu.

• If available for your video source, select Auto as the Resolution setting in the Image menu.

• Select a computer video resolution and refresh rate that are compatible with the projector.

• If you are projecting from a computer using a VGA cable, press the Auto button on the remote control

to automatically adjust the tracking and sync. If the problem remains, display a uniformly patterned

image on the screen and manually adjust the Tracking and Sync settings.

• If you adjusted the image shape using the projector controls, try decreasing the Sharpness setting to

improve image quality.

348

• If you connected an extension power cable, try projecting without it to see if it caused interference in

the signal.

• If you are using the USB Display function, turn off the Transfer layered window setting in the Epson

USB Display Settings program on your Windows computer.

Parent topic: Solving Image or Sound Problems

Related references

Input Signal Settings - Signal I/O Menu

Supported Video Display Formats

Image Quality Settings - Image Menu

Related topics

Connecting to Video Sources

Connecting to Computer Sources

Solutions When the Image is Fuzzy or Blurry

If the projected image is fuzzy or blurry, try the following solutions:

• Adjust the image focus.

• Clean the projector lens.

• Position the projector close enough to the screen, and directly in front of it.

• Verify that the throw distance from the projector to your projection surface meets the specifications in

your projector's online Installation Guide.

• Position the projector so the keystone adjustment angle is not so wide that it distorts the image.

• Adjust the Sharpness setting to improve image quality.

• If you are projecting from a computer using a VGA cable, press the Auto button on the remote control

to automatically adjust the tracking and sync. If any bands or overall blurriness remain, display a

uniformly patterned image on the screen and manually adjust the Tracking and Sync settings.

• If you are projecting from a computer, use a lower resolution or adjust the computer's resolution to

match the projector's native resolution, if possible.

Parent topic: Solving Image or Sound Problems

Related references

Image Quality Settings - Image Menu

Related tasks

Focusing the Image

349

Cleaning the Lens

Solutions When the Image Brightness or Colors are Incorrect

If the projected image is too dark or light, or the colors are incorrect, try the following solutions:

• Press the Color Mode button on the remote control to try different color modes for the image and

environment.

• Check your video source settings.

• Adjust the available settings on the Image menu for the current input source, such as Brightness,

Contrast,Tint,White Balance,Color Saturation and RGBCMY.

• Make sure you selected the correct Signal Format or EDID setting in the Signal I/O menu, if available

for your video source.

• Make sure all the cables are securely connected to the projector and your video device. If you

connected long cables, try connecting shorter cables.

• Position the projector close enough to the screen.

• Make sure you have run the Light Source Calibration in the Management menu recently. If using

multiple projectors, perform the calibration on all projectors to ensure a consistent image quality.

• When using multiple projectors and the color of the projected image does not match between the

projectors, set Color Mode to Multi-Projection and adjust the Color Uniformity, Light Source

Brightness Control, Color Matching, Black Level, and RGBCMY settings to resolve the color

differences.

Parent topic: Solving Image or Sound Problems

Related references

Input Signal Settings - Signal I/O Menu

Feature Settings - Operation Menu

Administration Settings - Management Menu

Image Quality Settings - Image Menu

Multiple Projector Operation Settings - Multi-Projection Menu

Solutions When an Afterimage Remains On the Projected Image

If you see an afterimage in the projected image, select Refresh Mode >Start in the Management menu.

Parent topic: Solving Image or Sound Problems

Related references

Administration Settings - Management Menu

350

Solutions to Sound Problems

If there is no sound when you expect it or the volume is too low or high, try the following solutions:

• Adjust the projector's volume settings.

• Press the A/V Mute button on the remote control to resume video and audio if they were temporarily

stopped.

• Check your computer or video source to make sure the volume is turned up and the audio output is set

for the correct source.

• Try disconnecting and reconnecting the audio cable.

• Check the audio cable connections between the projector and your video source.

• If you do not hear sound from an HDMI source, set the connected device to PCM output.

• Make sure any connected audio cables are labeled "No Resistance."

• If you are using the USB Display function, turn on the Output audio from the projector setting in the

Epson USB Display Settings program on your computer.

• If you are using a Mac and you do not hear sound from an HDMI source, make sure your Mac

supports audio through the HDMI port. If not, you need to connect an audio cable.

• If you want to use a connected audio source when the projector isn't projecting any images, set the

Quick Startup option in the Operation menu to Off and make sure the A/V Output setting in the

Signal I/O menu is set to Always On.

• If the volume for the computer is set to the minimum while the projector's volume is set to maximum,

the sound level may be mixed. Turn up the computer's volume and decrease the projector's volume

(when using Epson iProjection [Windows/Mac] or USB Display).

• Make sure the Audio Output Device option is set to the correct audio port for your video device.

• If you turn the projector on immediately after turning it off, the cooling fans may run at high speed

momentarily and cause an unexpected noise. This is normal.

Parent topic: Solving Image or Sound Problems

Related references

Input Signal Settings - Signal I/O Menu

Related tasks

Connecting to a Computer for Sound

Connecting to a Video Source for Sound

Connecting to External Speakers

Controlling the Volume with the Volume Buttons

351

Solutions to Microphone Problems

If there is no sound when you use a microphone connected to the projector, try the following solutions:

• Make sure the microphone is securely connected to the projector.

• Adjust the Mic Input Level setting in the Signal I/O menu. If the setting is too high, the sound of the

other connected devices will be too low.

Parent topic: Solving Image or Sound Problems

Related references

Input Signal Settings - Signal I/O Menu

Related tasks

Connecting a Microphone

Solving Projector or Remote Control Operation Problems

Check the solutions in these sections if you have problems operating the projector or remote control.

Solutions to Projector Power or Shut-Off Problems

Solutions to Remote Control Problems

Solutions to Password Problems

Solutions When a Battery Message Appears

Parent topic: Solving Problems

Solutions to Projector Power or Shut-Off Problems

If the projector does not come on when you press the power button or it shuts off unexpectedly, try the

following solutions:

• Make sure the power cord is securely connected to the projector and to a working electrical outlet.

• The projector's buttons may be locked for security. Unlock the buttons or use the remote control to

turn on the projector.

• If the projector's laser shuts off unexpectedly, it may have entered standby mode after a period of

inactivity. Press the power button to wake the projector and adjust the Sleep Mode setting to change

the sleep interval. The A/V Mute Timer may be set. Set the A/V Mute Timer to Off in the Operation

menu.

• If the projector's laser shuts off, the Status light is flashing, and the Temp light is on, the projector has

overheated and shut off. Check the solutions for this light status.

352

• If the power button on the remote control does not turn on the projector, check its batteries and make

sure the Remote Receiver setting is turned on in the projector's menu, if available.

• The power cord may be defective. Try another power cord. If that doesn't work, disconnect the cord

and contact Epson.

• The cooling fans may run in standby status depending on the projector settings. Also, when the

projector wakes from standby status, the fans may cause an unexpected noise. This is not a

malfunction.

Parent topic: Solving Projector or Remote Control Operation Problems

Related references

Where to Get Help (U.S. and Canada)

Projector Light Status

Feature Settings - Operation Menu

Related tasks

Unlocking the Projector's Buttons

Solutions to Remote Control Problems

If the projector does not respond to remote control commands, try the following solutions:

• Check that the remote control batteries are installed correctly and have power. If necessary, replace

the batteries.

• Make sure you are operating the remote control within the reception angle and range of the projector.

• Make sure the projector is not warming up or shutting down.

• Check to see if a button on the remote control is stuck down, causing it to enter sleep mode. Release

the button to wake the remote control up.

• Strong fluorescent lighting, direct sunlight, or infrared device signals may be interfering with the

projector's remote receivers. Dim the lights or move the projector away from the sun or interfering

equipment.

• If available, turn on one of the remote receivers in the projector's menu system, or check if all the

remote receivers were turned off.

• If the remote receiver setting is off, press and hold the Menu button on the remote for at least 15

seconds to restore the default setting.

• If you assigned an ID number to the remote control to operate multiple projectors, you may need to

check or change the ID setting (feature not available with all projectors).

353

• To set the remote control so it will operate any projector, hold down the ID button and press the 0/All

button.

• If you lose the remote control, you can purchase another from an Epson parts distributor.

Parent topic: Solving Projector or Remote Control Operation Problems

Related references

Remote Control Operation

Related tasks

Installing Batteries in the Remote Control

Replacing the Remote Control Batteries

Solutions to Password Problems

If you cannot enter or remember a password, try the following solutions:

• You may have turned on password protection without first setting a password. Try entering 0000 using

the remote control. If you lose the remote control, you cannot enter a password. Order a new one from

Epson.

• If you have entered an incorrect password too many times and see a message displaying a request

code, write down the code and contact Epson. Do not attempt to enter the password again. Provide

the request code and proof of ownership for assistance in unlocking the projector.

• If you set a Epson Web Control password and forgot the user ID or password, try entering the

following:

• User ID: EPSONWEB

• Default password: admin

• If you set a Remote password (in Epson Web Control) and forgot the user ID or password, try entering

the following:

• User ID: EPSONREMOTE

• Default password: guest

Parent topic: Solving Projector or Remote Control Operation Problems

Related concepts

Projector Security Features

354

Solutions When a Battery Message Appears

If you see a message telling you that the battery that saves your clock settings is running low, contact

Epson for help.

Parent topic: Solving Projector or Remote Control Operation Problems

Related references

Where to Get Help (U.S. and Canada)

Solving Network Problems

Check the solutions in these sections if you have problems using the projector on a network.

Solutions When Wireless Authentication Fails

Solutions When You Cannot Access the Projector Through the Web

Solutions When Network Alert E-Mails are Not Received

Solutions When the Image Contains Static During Network Projection

Solutions When You Cannot Connect Using Screen Mirroring

Solutions When the Image or Sound Contains Static When Using Screen Mirroring

Solutions When the Projected Screen is not Shared Correctly

Parent topic: Solving Problems

Solutions When Wireless Authentication Fails

If you cannot authenticate a wireless connection, try the following solutions:

• If the wireless settings are correct, but authentication fails, you may need to update the Date & Time

settings in the Management menu, if available.

• Check the Security settings and passphrase in the Network menu.

• Make sure the connected device is on and operating properly.

• If the access point security is WPA3-EAP, change the access point setting to WPA2/WPA3-EAP.

Parent topic: Solving Network Problems

Related references

Event ID Code List

Network Settings - Network Menu

Administration Settings - Management Menu

355

Related tasks

Setting the Date and Time

Solutions When You Cannot Access the Projector Through the Web

If you are unable to access the projector through a web browser, make sure you are using the correct ID

and password, which are case sensitive.

Note: You cannot change the user ID.

• You may need to log in to access some options on the Web Control screen. If you see a log in window,

enter EPSONWEB as the user ID and enter the password set in the projector's Network menu as the

password. The default password is admin.

• Avoid connecting via a proxy server.

• Make sure you have access to the network the projector is on.

• Check the IP address on the projector, then reenter the IP address in the browser search bar.

Note: The user ID and password are case sensitive.

Parent topic: Solving Network Problems

Solutions When Network Alert E-Mails are Not Received

If you do not receive an e-mail alerting you to problems with a projector over the network, try the

following solutions:

• Make sure the projector is turned on and connected to the network correctly. (If an error shut down the

projector, it cannot send an e-mail.)

• Make sure you set up the projector e-mail alert settings correctly on the projector's Network Mail

Notification menu or in the network software.

• Set the Standby Mode setting to Communication On so the network software can monitor the

projector in standby mode. Change the Port setting according to your network environment.

Parent topic: Solving Network Problems

Related references

Network Projector E-mail Alert Messages

Related tasks

Setting Up Projector Network E-Mail Alerts

356

Solutions When the Image Contains Static During Network Projection

If the projected image contains static during network projection, try the following solutions:

• Check for any obstacles between the access point, the computer, the mobile device, and the projector.

If necessary, change their positions to improve communication. Also make sure that they are not too

far apart; move them closer together and try to connect again.

• If the wireless connection is slow or your projected image contains noise, check for interference from

other equipment, such as a Bluetooth device or microwave. Move the interfering device farther away

or expand your wireless bandwidth.

• If the connection speed declines, reduce the number of connected devices.

Parent topic: Solving Network Problems

Solutions When You Cannot Connect Using Screen Mirroring

If you are unable to connect to the projector using Screen Mirroring, try the following solutions:

• Select On as the Screen Mirroring setting in the projector's Network menu.

• Select On as the Simple AP setting in the projector's Network menu.

• Make sure the Display Name setting does not contain a dash ("-") or it may not be displayed correctly

on the mobile device.

• Select Off as the Screen Mirroring setting, then select On again.

• Make sure the mobile device settings are correct and restart the device.

• You may not be able to connect immediately after disconnecting from the projector. Wait a while and

try connecting again.

• If you have previously connected to the projector using Screen Mirroring, the device may have saved

the previous connection information. Delete the saved information and connect to the projector from

the list of available devices.

• If you are unable to use two Screen Mirroring sources at the same time, set the Interrupt Connection

setting to Off.

Parent topic: Solving Network Problems

Solutions When the Image or Sound Contains Static When Using Screen Mirroring

If the projected image or sound contains static when connecting using Screen Mirroring, try the following

solutions:

• Avoid covering the Wi-Fi antenna of the mobile device.

357

• If you use a Screen Mirroring connection and an internet connection at the same time, the image may

freeze or contain noise. Disconnect from the internet to improve the connection speed of the mobile

device.

• Make sure the projection contents meet the Screen Mirroring requirements.

• Depending on the settings of the mobile device, the connection may be lost when the device enters

power saving mode. Check the power saving settings on the mobile device.

• Make sure your mobile device has the latest version of its wireless driver and firmware installed.

Parent topic: Solving Network Problems

Solutions When the Projected Screen is not Shared Correctly

If the Screen Sharing feature does not deliver the screen to a receiving projector properly, try the

following solutions:

• Connect the projector to the same network as the projector that is sharing its screen.

• Make sure the receiving projector supports the Screen Sharing function.

• Make sure the Screen Sharing setting in the Network menu is set to On for all projectors.

• Close any running Epson iProjection (Windows/Mac) software.

• Make sure the image being projected is not protected by copyright.

• Make sure Sharing is displayed on the status bar that appears in the upper center part of the screen.

If it is not displayed, try reconnecting.

• If the firmware version of the projectors sharing the screen is not the same, you may need to update

the projector's firmware to share your screen.

Parent topic: Solving Network Problems

Related references

Network Settings - Network Menu

Related tasks

Starting a Shared Screen Session

Solving Interactive Problems

Check the solutions in these sections if you have problems using the interactive system.

Note: If the "Error occurred in the Easy Interactive Function" message appears, contact Epson for help.

358

Solutions When the Interactive Pens Do Not Work

Solutions When the Interactive Pen Position Is Not Accurate

Solutions When the Interactive Pens Are Slow or Difficult to Use

Solutions When the Interactive Pens Cause Interference or Unwanted Effects

Solutions When Finger Touch Interactivity Does Not Work

Solutions When You Cannot Operate a Computer from the Projected Screen

Solutions for Problems With Capturing, Printing, Saving, or Scanning

Solutions for Problems with Whiteboard Mode

Parent topic: Solving Problems

Solutions When the Interactive Pens Do Not Work

If the interactive pens do not work, try the following solutions:

• The pens turn off automatically when not in use. Pick up the pen to turn it back on.

• Make sure PC Interactivity is set to On on the projector's interactive toolbar.

• Make sure you are not covering the black section near the tip of the pen.

• Make sure the pen tip is securely attached to the pen.

• Try replacing the soft pen tip with the hard pen tip.

• Make sure nothing is blocking the signal between the pen and the interactive pen receiver on the

projector.

• Try holding the pen at a different angle so that your hand is not blocking the signal.

• Make sure the cable cover is in place to keep cables from blocking the signal.

• Make sure the pen battery has enough power. Press the button on the side of the pen to check

remaining battery power. Try replacing the battery.

• If you are projecting from a computer, make sure the USB cable is connected to the computer and

projector.

• Dim the room lights and turn off any fluorescent lights. Make sure the projection surface and pen

receiver are not in direct sunlight or other sources of bright lighting.

• Remove any decorative lights from around the projector or projection surface.

• If the pen tip is worn out or damaged, you may need to replace it.

• Make sure the interactive pen receiver on the projector is clean and free from dust.

• Make sure there is no interference from infrared remote controls, mice, or infrared microphones.

359

• Make sure you have calibrated the system. Try recalibrating.

• If you are using a Mac with your projector, make sure that you installed the Easy Interactive Tools

software, and that you have downloaded and installed the latest Easy Interactive Driver from the

Epson support site.

• If you are using multiple interactive projectors in the same room, make sure you are using a sync

cable between the projectors and that the Installation of Projectors >Sync of Projectors setting in

the Pen/Touch menu is set to Wired. If you do not have a sync cable, set the Infrared Intensity

setting to Strong in the Pen/Touch menu.

• Make sure there are no devices, such as rotary devices or transformers, generating powerful noise

near the projector. The interactive features may not operate correctly.

• If you are using Epson iProjection (Windows/Mac) software, select Set Options and make sure Use

Interactive Pen is enabled. Also, select the Adjust performance tab and select Transfer layered

window.

• If you are using a Quick Wireless Connection USB Key, start the Epson Quick Wireless Connections

Settings program on your computer, select the General settings tab and make sure Use Interactive

Pen is enabled. Also, select the Adjust performance tab and select Transfer layered window.

• When using multiple projectors and you are not able to use the interactive feature, check the USB

cable connection between the projectors.

• Make sure the USB cable is securely connected to the USB-A1 or USB-A2 port on the first

projector.

• If the USB-B2 setting is Off in the Pen/Touch menu, connect the USB cable to the USB-B1 port of

the other projector.

• If the USB-B2 setting is set to one of the HDMI sources in the Pen/Touch menu, connect the USB

cable to the USB-B2 port of the other projector. The interactive feature is only available when you

select the input source specified in the USB-B2 setting.

Parent topic: Solving Interactive Problems

Related concepts

Pen Calibration

Related references

Pen and Touch Setup Settings - Pen/Touch Menu

Related tasks

Replacing the Hard Pen Tips

Replacing the Soft Pen Tips

Using the Pens

360

Solutions When the Interactive Pen Position Is Not Accurate

If the pen position is not the same as the mouse pointer, try the following solutions:

• Make sure you have calibrated the system. Try manual calibration.

• Reset the keystone, Quick Corner, and Arc Correction settings to their factory defaults.

• If you mounted the projector using a wall mount and used keystone or other digital correction settings

to adjust the image, return the settings to their factory defaults. Instead, use the adjustment dials on

the wall mount to adjust the image shape; do not use any digital correction. Then focus the image and

recalibrate.

• If you use the E-Zoom + button on the remote control to enlarge the image, the pen position is not

accurate. When you return the image to the original size, the position should be correct.

• Select Reset All from the Initial/All Settings menu to restore the projector settings to their default

values.

• Set the output resolution of your computer to match the native resolution of the projector. If you

connected your projector through a video scaler, make sure the video scaler output resolution setting

matches your projector's native resolution.

• Focus the image to sharpen it.

• Make sure the cable cover is in place to keep cables from blocking the signal.

• Try adjusting the pen operation area.

• In PC Interactivity (in the Pen/Touch menu), turn off the Auto Adjust Pen Area setting and select the

Manual Adj. Pen Area setting.

Parent topic: Solving Interactive Problems

Related concepts

Pen Calibration

Related references

Pen and Touch Setup Settings - Pen/Touch Menu

General Projector Specifications

Installation Settings - Installation Menu

Related tasks

Adjusting the Pen Operation Area

Removing and Attaching the Cable Cover

Zooming Into and Out of Images

361

Solutions When the Interactive Pens Are Slow or Difficult to Use

If the pens are difficult to use or respond too slowly, try the following solutions:

• For easier operation, hold the pen perpendicular to the projection surface.

• For the best performance, connect your computer to the projector using a VGA or HDMI cable for

display and the USB cable for interactivity.

• If you are using USB Display in Windows, you may need to disable Windows Aero in the Epson USB

Display Settings program on your computer.

• If you are having difficulty double-clicking on a Mac, go to the System Preferences menu, select

Mouse,Trackpad, or Mouse & Trackpad, and reduce the Double-click speed.

• Set the Pen/Touch >Pen Hovering setting to Off.

Parent topic: Solving Interactive Problems

Related references

Pen and Touch Setup Settings - Pen/Touch Menu

Related tasks

Using the Pens

Solutions When the Interactive Pens Cause Interference or Unwanted Effects

If the pens are causing interference or unwanted effects, try the following solutions:

• When you use two pens at the same time, make sure to use them at least 4 inches (10.16 cm) apart.

• Do not rest the pens on the image area of an interactive table to avoid interference with your

computer's mouse.

• Make sure that nothing is blocking the direct line to the interactive pen receiver on the projector.

Parent topic: Solving Interactive Problems

Solutions When Finger Touch Interactivity Does Not Work

If finger touch interactivity does not work, try the following solutions:

• Make sure a Touch Unit is installed correctly and the cable is properly connected. See your projector's

online Installation Guide for details.

• If the light on the Touch Unit is not on, check the Touch Unit settings in the Pen/Touch menu and

make sure the Power setting is set to On.

• Make sure touch interactivity is activated on the toolbar.

362

• If you are using a Mac with your projector, make sure that you installed the Easy Interactive Tools

software, and that you have downloaded and installed the latest Easy Interactive Driver from the

Epson support site.

• Adjust the angle on the Touch Unit. See your projector's online Installation Guide for details.

• Make sure there are no obstacles (such as cables) between the Touch Unit's laser diffusion ports and

the projection surface. If there are any obstacles that are difficult to move, attach the infrared

deflectors to the projection surface. See your projector's online Installation Guide for details.

• Remove any decorative lights from around the projector or projection surface.

• If you are having difficulty double-clicking on a Mac, go to the System Preferences menu, select

Mouse,Trackpad, or Mouse & Trackpad, and reduce the Double-click speed.

• Make sure there is no interference from infrared remote controls, mice, or infrared microphones.

• Make sure you have performed pen calibration and finger touch calibration. Try recalibrating.

• Keep your clothing or parts of your body more than 0.4 inches (1 cm) away from the projection

surface.

• If there are people within 4 inches (10 cm) in front of or around the projection screen or there are any

obstacles causing interference, touch operations may not work properly.

• If touch operation does not work correctly even after calibration, check the Calibration Range setting

in the Pen/Touch menu. Select Wide if you drag items when touching the screen or Narrow if mouse

operations do not work smoothly.

• If you are using multiple projectors and see a touch unit setup error, try the following steps:

1. Perform touch unit angle adjustment on the first projector, then turn off edge blending on the

second projector.

2. Perform pen/touch auto calibration on the first projector and then perform touch unit angle

adjustment on the second projector.

3. Turn on edge blending on the second projector and then perform pen/touch auto calibration on it

again.

Parent topic: Solving Interactive Problems

Related concepts

Pen Calibration

Related references

Pen and Touch Setup Settings - Pen/Touch Menu

The Whiteboard Toolbar

363

Multiple Projector Operation Settings - Multi-Projection Menu

Related tasks

Calibrating for Finger Touch Interactivity

Calibrating Automatically

Performing Touch Unit Angle Adjustment

Solutions When You Cannot Operate a Computer from the Projected Screen

If you are unable to access a computer from the projected screen, try the following solutions:

• Make sure the USB Display setting in the Signal I/O menu is set to On.

• Make sure you perform pen calibration when using the interactive pen for the first time so that the

projector recognizes the position of the pen correctly.

• Make sure PC Interactivity is turned on in the projector's interactive toolbar.

• Make sure the USB cable is securely connected. Disconnect the USB cable, and then reconnect it.

• When you are connecting your computer to the projector's USB-B2 port, make sure the USB-B2

setting in the Pen/Touch menu matches the HDMI input your computer is connected to.

• When connecting your computer to either of the control pad's (BrightLink 1485Fi) HDMI ports, make

sure to connect your computer to the USB-B port on the control pad and not directly to the projector.

• When connecting using Screen Mirroring, you need to set up your computer. Hold down the Windows

key and press Kon your keyboard at the same time, then select Allow mouse, keyboard, touch, and

pen input from this device.

Parent topic: Solving Interactive Problems

Solutions for Problems With Capturing, Printing, Saving, or Scanning

If you are having trouble capturing and pasting, or printing, saving, or scanning, try the following

solutions:

• If you are having trouble pasting a captured image, make sure the image is not HDCP protected.

• If a black frame appears around a pasted image, it may be because the image was shifted or resized.

• Connect only one printer or multifunction device at a time, and make sure the device is supported by

the projector.

• If you are having trouble printing or scanning, make sure the printer is not out of ink, jammed, or in any

other error state.

364

• For USB printing or scanning, make sure the printer is connected to the USB-A port on the projector or

control pad (BrightLink 1485Fi). If you are using the control pad, make sure a USB cable is connected

between the projector's USB-A port and the upper USB-B port on the control pad.

• For USB printing or scanning, try connecting a different USB cable, and make sure the cables are less

than 16 feet (4.9 m) long.

• Check the settings on the Interactive menu.

Parent topic: Solving Interactive Problems

Related references

Interactive Settings - Interactive Menu

Related tasks

Connecting a Printer to the Control Pad

Connecting a USB Device to the Control Pad

Connecting a USB Device or Camera to the Projector

Solutions for Problems with Whiteboard Mode

If you are having problems with the whiteboard, try the following solutions:

• Enable the Drawing Function setting in the Interactive menu.

• When you create a single unified image projected from multiple projectors, whiteboard mode does not

start.

• When the Easy Interactive Tools software is in use, whiteboard mode does not start.

If the time is incorrect on the internal storage settings for whiteboard mode, you may need to update the

Date & Time settings in the projector's Management menu.

Parent topic: Solving Interactive Problems

Related references

Interactive Settings - Interactive Menu

Administration Settings - Management Menu

Related tasks

Setting the Date and Time

Where to Get Help (U.S. and Canada)

If you need to contact Epson for technical support services, use the following support options.

365

Internet Support

Visit Epson's support website at epson.com/support (U.S.) or epson.ca/support (Canada) and select

your product for solutions to common problems with your projector. You can download utilities and

documentation, get FAQs and troubleshooting advice, or e-mail Epson with your questions.

Speak to a Support Representative

To use the Epson PrivateLine Support service, call (800) 637-7661. This service is available for the

duration of your warranty period. You may also speak with a projector support specialist by dialing (562)

276-4394 (U.S.) or (905) 709-3839 (Canada).

Support hours are Monday through Friday, 7 AM to 4 PM, Pacific Time.

Days and hours of support are subject to change without notice. Toll or long distance charges may

apply.

Before you call, have the following information ready:

• Product name

• Product serial number (located on the bottom or rear of the projector, or in the menu system)

• Proof of purchase (such as a store receipt) and date of purchase

• Computer or video configuration

• Description of the problem

Purchase Supplies and Accessories

You can purchase screens, other optional accessories, and replacement parts from an Epson authorized

reseller. To find the nearest reseller, call 800-GO-EPSON (800-463-7766) in the U.S. or 800-807-7766 in

Canada. Or you can purchase online at epsonstore.com (U.S. sales) or epsonstore.ca (Canadian sales).

You can purchase a replacement remote control from an Epson parts distributor here (U.S. sales) or

here (Canadian sales).

Parent topic: Solving Problems

Related references

Projector Light Status

366

Technical Specifications

These sections list the technical specifications of your projector.

General Projector Specifications

Projector Light Source Specifications

Interactive Pen Specifications

Touch Unit Specifications

Remote Control Specifications

Projector Dimension Specifications

Projector Electrical Specifications

Projector Environmental Specifications

Projector Safety and Approvals Specifications

Safety and Approvals Specifications for Latin America

Supported Video Display Formats

USB Display System Requirements

General Projector Specifications

Type of display Poly-silicon TFT active matrix

Native resolution 1080p (1366 × 768 × 2)

Note: Pixel shifting technology achieves Full HD resolution on

screen.

Lens F=1.5

Focal length: 3.9 mm

Color reproduction Full color, up to 1.7 billion colors

367

Brightness Normal Light Source mode:

White light output 5000 lumens (ISO 21118 standard)

Color light output 5000 lumens

Quiet or Extended Light Source mode:

White light output 3500 lumens (ISO 21118 standard)

Custom mode:

White light output 3500 to 5000 lumens (ISO 21118 standard)

Note: Color brightness (color light output) and white brightness

(white light output) will vary depending on usage conditions. Color

light output measured in accordance with IDMS 15.4; white light

output measured in accordance with ISO 21118.

Contrast ratio Over 2,500,000:1 with Dynamic Color Mode, Normal Light Source

Mode, and Wide Zoom on

Image size

(in native aspect ratio)

65 inches (1.65 m) to 100 inches (2.54 m)

Projection distance

(in native aspect ratio)

15.4 inches (0.39 m) to 24.1 inches (0.61 m)

Projection methods Front, rear, wall-mounted, table-mounted, ceiling-mounted

Optical aspect ratio

(width-to-height)

16:9

Focus adjustment Manual

Zoom adjustment Digital

Zoom ratio

(Tele-to-Wide)

1.0 to 1.35

Internal sound system 8 W × 8W stereo

Noise level 36 dB (Normal or Extended Light Source Mode)

27 dB (Quiet Light Source Mode)

Keystone correction angle ± 3°

368

USB Type B port compatibility Two USB 2.0 compliant ports for USB display, wireless LAN module

connection, interactivity, firmware update, or copying menu settings

USB Type A port compatibility Two USB 2.0 compliant ports for USB memory device, printer,

Epson document camera, wireless LAN module connection,

firmware update, or copying menu settings

Parent topic: Technical Specifications

Projector Light Source Specifications

Type Laser diode

Light source output power Up to 104.5 W

Wavelength 449 to 461 nm

Light source life

(approximate)

Normal or Quiet Light Source Mode:

Up to about 20000 hours

Extended Light Source Mode:

Up to about 30000 hours

Note: Turn off this product when not in use to prolong the life of the projector. Laser life will vary

depending upon mode selected, environmental conditions, and usage. Brightness decreases over time.

Parent topic: Technical Specifications

Interactive Pen Specifications

Batteries One AA alkaline or manganese

Size 6.3 inches (161 mm) long; diameter 0.94 inches (24 mm)

Weight (without battery) 1.06 oz (30 g)

Parent topic: Technical Specifications

Touch Unit Specifications

Technology Infrared Laser (Class 1)

369

Dimensions Height: 1.58 inches (40 mm)

Width: 16.6 inches (422 mm)

Depth: 2.56 inches (65 mm)

Weight 21.2 oz (600 g)

Parent topic: Technical Specifications

Remote Control Specifications

Reception range 19.7 feet (6 m)

Batteries Two alkaline or manganese AA

Parent topic: Technical Specifications

Projector Dimension Specifications

Height (excluding feet) 8.25 inches (209.5 mm)

Width 18 inches (458 mm)

Depth (excluding cable cover) 14.8 inches (375 mm)

Weight (excluding cable cover) 20.9 lb (9.5 kg)

Parent topic: Technical Specifications

Projector Electrical Specifications

Rated frequency 50/60 Hz

Power supply 100 to 240 V AC ±10%

3.8 to 1.7 A

370

Power consumption

(100 to 120 V)

Operating:

Normal or Custom Power Consumption mode: 381 W

Extended or Quiet Power Consumption mode: 270 W

Standby:

0.5 W (Communication Off), 2.0 W (Communication On)

Power consumption

(220 to 240 V)

Operating:

Normal or Custom Power Consumption mode: 366 W

Extended or Quiet Power Consumption mode: 262 W

Standby:

0.5 W (Communication Off), 2.0 W (Communication On)

Parent topic: Technical Specifications

Projector Environmental Specifications

Temperature Operating - Single projector:

32 to 104 °F (0 to 40 °C)

Operating - Multiple projectors:

32 to 95 °F (0 to 35 °C)

Storage:

14 to 140 °F (–10 to 60 °C)

Humidity (relative, non-

condensing)

Operating: 20 to 80%

Storage: 10 to 90%

Operating altitude Up to 4921 feet (1500 m)

Up to 10000 feet (3048 m) with High Altitude Mode enabled

Parent topic: Technical Specifications

371

Projector Safety and Approvals Specifications

United States FCC Part 15 Class B (DoC)

UL60950-1 2nd edition (cTUVus Mark)

Canada ICES-003 Class B

CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1

Parent topic: Technical Specifications

Safety and Approvals Specifications for Latin America

Notice for Argentina

WLAN/Bluetooth Module Model: WLU5630B-D101(RoHS)

Brand: EPSON

CNC ID: C-23113

Notice for Mexico

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference,

and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause

undesired operation of the device.

Product Model: H919/H921(BrightLink 1480Fi+/1485Fi+)

WLAN/Bluetooth Module Model: WLU5630B-D101 (RoHS)

Brand: EPSON

IFT Certification Number: RCPEPWL19-0590

Notice for Paraguay

Imported by:

Fastrax, S.A.

Av. Perú esq. Río de Janeiro, Barrios Las Mercedes, Asunción, Paraguay

Imported by:

Sol Control S.R.L.

372

Av. Gral. Bernardino Caballero 810 esq. Celsa Speratti, Asunción, Paraguay

Notice for Peru

Product Model: BrightLink 1480Fi+/1485Fi+

Brand: EPSON

This product uses the following WLAN/Bluetooth module:

WLAN Module Model: WLU5630B-D101(RoHS)

FCC ID: BKMAE-WLU5630

Product Manufacturer: Seiko Epson Corporation

Address: 3-3-5 Owa Suwa-shi, Nagano-Ken 392-8502, Japan

Parent topic: Technical Specifications

Supported Video Display Formats

For best results, your computer's monitor port or video card resolution should be set to display in the

projector's native resolution. However, your projector includes Epson's SizeWise chip that supports other

computer display resolutions, so your image will be resized to fit automatically.

Your computer's monitor port or video card refresh rate (vertical frequency) must be compatible with the

projector. (See your computer or video card manual for details.)

The table here lists the compatible refresh rate and resolution for each compatible video display format.

Display format Refresh rate (in Hz) Resolution (in pixels)

Computer signals (analog RGB)

VGA 60/72/75/85 640 × 480

SVGA 60/72/75/85 800 × 600

XGA 60/70/75/85 1024 × 768

WXGA 60-1 1280 × 768

60-3 1366 × 768

60/75/85 1280 × 800

WXGA+ 60/75/85 1440 × 900

WXGA++ 60 1600 × 900

373

Display format Refresh rate (in Hz) Resolution (in pixels)

SXGA1 70/75/85 1152 × 864

SXGA2 60/75/85 1280 × 960

SXGA3 60/75/85 1280 × 1024

SXGA+ 60/75 1400 × 1050

WSXGA+* 60 1680 × 1050

UXGA 60 1600 × 1200

1920 × 1080 50/60 1920 × 1080

WUXGA (Reduced Blanking) 60 1920 × 1200

Composite video

TV (NTSC, NTSC4.43) 60 720 × 480

TV (SECAM) 50 720 × 576

TV (PAL, N-PAL) 50 720 × 576

TV (PAL, M-PAL) 60 720 × 576

Component video

SDTV (480p) 59.94 720 × 480

SDTV (576p) 50 720 × 576

HDTV (720p) 50/59.94/60 1280 × 720

HDTV (1080p) 50/59.94/60 1920 × 1080

HDMI/HDBaseT Control input signals

VGA 60 640 × 480

SVGA 60 800 × 600

XGA 60 1024 × 768

WXGA 60 1280 × 800

60 1366 × 768

WXGA+ 60 1440 × 900

WXGA++ 60 1600 × 900

374

Display format Refresh rate (in Hz) Resolution (in pixels)

WSXGA+ 60 1680 × 1050

SXGA2 60 1280 × 960

SXGA3 60 1280 × 1024

SXGA+ 60 1400 × 1050

UXGA 60 1600 × 1200

1920 × 1080 50/60 1920 × 1080

WUXGA (Reduced Blanking) 60 1920 × 1200

QXGA 60 2048 × 1536

WQHD 60 2560 × 1440

WQXGA (Reduced Blanking) 60 2560 × 1600

SDTV (480i/480p) 59.94 720 × 480

SDTV (576i/576p) 50 720 × 576

HDTV (720p) 50/59.94/60 1280 × 720

HDTV (1080i) 50/59.94/60 1920 × 1080

HDTV (1080p) 23.98/24/29.97/30/50/59.94/60 1920 × 1080

4K 23.98/24/25/29.97/30/50/59.94/6

3840 × 2160

4K (SMPTE) 23.98/24/50/59.94/60 4096 × 2160

Unique Aspect (2 projectors connected by a daisy chain)

Unique Aspect (16:6) 60 1920 × 720

Unique Aspect (21:9) 60 1920 × 810

3240 × 1080 60 3240 × 1080

*Wide resolution only

Parent topic: Technical Specifications

375

USB Display System Requirements

Your computer system must meet the system requirements here to use the projector's USB Display

software.

Requirement Windows Mac

Operating system Windows 7 Ultimate, Enterprise,

Professional, and Home Premium (32-

and 64-bit); Home Basic and Starter (32-

bit)

OS X 10.11.x (64-bit), macOS

10.12.x (64-bit), macOS 10.13.x (64-

bit), macOS 10.14.x (64-bit), and

macOS 10.15.x (64-bit)

Windows 8.x, Pro, and Enterprise (32-

and 64-bit)

Windows 10 Home, Pro, and Enterprise

(32- and 64-bit)

CPU Intel Core2 Duo or faster (Intel Core i3 or

faster recommended)

Intel Core2 Duo or faster (Intel Core

i5 or faster recommended)

Memory 2GB or more (4GB or more recommended)

Hard disk space 20MB or more

Display Resolution between 640 × 480 and 1920 × 1200, 16-bit color or greater

Parent topic: Technical Specifications

Related references

Input Signal Settings - Signal I/O Menu

376

Notices

Check these sections for important notices about your projector.

Recycling (U.S. and Canada)

Important Safety Information

Laser Safety Information

Laser Light Source Warning

Important Safety Instructions

List of Safety Symbols (corresponding to IEC60950-1 A2)

FCC Compliance Statement

Binding Arbitration and Class Waiver

Trademarks

Recycling (U.S. and Canada)

Epson offers a recycling program for end of life products. Please go to this site for information on how to

return your products for proper disposal.

Parent topic: Notices

Important Safety Information

Caution: Never look into the projector lens when the laser is turned on; the bright light can damage your

eyes. Never let children look into the lens when it is on. Never open any cover on the projector, except

the filter covers. Dangerous electrical voltages inside the projector can severely injure you. Except as

specifically explained in this User's Guide, do not attempt to service this product yourself. Refer all

servicing to qualified service personnel.

Warning: The projector and its accessories come packaged in plastic bags. Keep plastic bags away

from small children to avoid any risk of suffocation.

Parent topic: Notices

377

Laser Safety Information

This projector is a Class 2 laser product that complies with the IEC/EN60825-1:2007 international

standard for lasers. Follow these safety instructions when using the projector.

Warning: Possibly hazardous optical radiation emitted from this product. Do not look at operating light

source. Eye injury may result.

• If an error occurs in the projector or Touch Unit, turn off the power and unplug the projector and Touch

Unit immediately. Continuing to use the projector or Touch Unit could result in an electric shock, fire,

or visual impairment. Contact Epson support.

• Do not attempt to disassemble or modify the projector or Touch Unit. The projector contains a high-

power laser component. Serious injury could result.

• Do not look into the lens during projection. Also, do not look into the lens using optical devices, such

as a magnifying glass or telescope. This could cause visual impairment.

• Do not place flammable objects in front of the lens. Objects could catch fire.

• When turning on the projector at a distance using the remote control, make sure no one is looking into

the lens.

• Do not allow small children to operate the projector. Children must be accompanied by an adult.

• Do not apply optical devices, such as a magnifying glass or reflector, to the projected image. Using the

projector may result in physical harm, fire, or an accident.

• Do not block the light from the lens during projection. The high temperature in this area could cause

burns, fire, or other damage. The lens may overheat due to the reflected light and could cause the

projector to malfunction.

• Before using the projector, make sure there is nothing in the area that could reflect the projected

image.

• When disposing of the projector, do not disassemble it. Dispose of the projector in accordance with

your local or national laws and regulations.

378

Labels are attached to the projector to indicate it is a Class 2 laser product and complies with FDA

performance standards for laser products except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated

June 24, 2007:

•Inside

379

•Top/Side

380

•Top

Parent topic: Notices

Laser Light Source Warning

Refer to the table here for the Exposure Hazard Values (EHV) in accordance with the IEC62471-2:2009

standard. The EHV indicates the hazard level for objects in front of the light source for 0.25 seconds at a

distance of 7.9 inches (20 cm). The higher the value, the greater the hazard level.

Exposure Hazard Value 0.68

Parent topic: Notices

Important Safety Instructions

Follow these safety instructions when setting up and using the projector:

• Do not look into the lens when the projector is on. The bright light can damage your eyes. Avoid

standing in front of the projector so the bright light does not shine into your eyes.

• Do not place any flammable objects in front of the projector lens, otherwise, a fire may occur.

381

• Do not touch the lens with bare hands.

• Do not place the projector on an unstable cart, stand, or table or on a surface that is unable to support

its weight. Otherwise, it could fall or topple causing an accident and injury.

• If you use the projector tilted at an angle of more than 3°, it could be damaged and cause an accident.

• If the projector is mounted on a ceiling or wall, it should be installed by qualified technicians using

mounting hardware designed for use with this projector. When installing the projector in a high

position, take measures to prevent it from falling by using wires to ensure safety in an emergency,

such as an earthquake, and to prevent accidents. If the projector is not installed correctly, the projector

could fall. This may result in injury or accidents. Contact your dealer to carry out the installation work.

• Failure to install the ceiling mount and projector may cause the projector to fall. After installing the

specific Epson mount that supports your projector, make sure you secure the mount to all of the

projector's ceiling mount fixing points. Also, secure the projector and the mounts using wire that is

strong enough to hold their weight.

• Do not install in locations where salt damage could occur, or in locations subject to corrosive gas such

as sulphuric gas from hot springs. Otherwise, corrosion could cause the projector to fall. It could also

cause the projector to malfunction.

• When installing or adjusting a ceiling or wall mount, do not use adhesives to prevent the screws from

loosening and do not use oils or lubricants. This may cause the projector case to crack and the

projector to fall from its ceiling mount. This could cause serious injury to anyone under the mount and

could damage the projector.

• Do not install the projector in locations exposed to high humidity and dust, such as on a kitchen

counter, in the kitchen, or near a humidifier, or in locations exposed to oil smoke or steam. Doing so

could cause fire or electric shock.

Examples of environments that could cause the projector to fall due to case deterioration:

• Locations subject to excessive smoke or airborne oil particles, such as factories or kitchens

• Locations containing volatile solvents or chemicals, such as factories or laboratories

• Locations where the projector could be subjected to detergents or chemicals, such as factories or

kitchens

• Locations in which aroma oils are often used, such as relaxation rooms

• Near devices that produce excessive smoke, airborne oil particles, or foam at events

• Do not use the projector near water, sources of heat, high-voltage electrical wires, or sources of

magnetic fields.

• Use the type of power source indicated on the projector. Use of a different power source may result in

fire or electric shock. If you are not sure of the power available, consult your dealer or power company.

382

• Place the projector near a wall outlet where the plug can be easily unplugged.

• Take the following precautions when handling the plug: Do not hold the plug with wet hands. Do not

insert the plug into a dusty outlet. Insert the plug firmly into the outlet. Do not pull the power cord when

disconnecting the plug; always be sure to hold the plug when disconnecting it. Do not overload wall

outlets, extension cords, or power strips. Failure to comply with these precautions could result in fire or

electric shock.

• Do not place the projector where the cord can be walked on. This may result in fraying or damage to

the plug.

• Unplug the projector from the wall outlet and allow to cool before cleaning. Use a dry cloth (or, for

stubborn dirt or stains, a moist cloth that has been wrung dry) for cleaning. Do not use liquid or aerosol

cleaners, any sprays containing flammable gas, or solvents such as alcohol, paint thinner, or benzine.

• Do not block the slots and openings in the projector case. They provide ventilation and prevent the

projector from overheating. If the vents are covered, the internal temperature could rise and cause a

fire. Do not place the projector in locations subject to high temperatures, such as near heating

equipment. Do not operate the projector on a sofa, rug, or other soft surface, or set it on top of loose

papers. Do not cover the projector with a blanket, curtain, or tablecloth. If you are setting up the

projector near a wall, leave at least 19.7 inches (50 cm) of space between the wall and the projector.

• Do not operate the projector in a closed-in cabinet unless proper ventilation is provided.

• Never allow objects of any kind to enter any openings in the projector. Do not leave objects, especially

flammable objects, near the projector. Do not place any containers of liquid on top of the unit. Never

spill liquid of any kind into the projector.

• Do not insert or drop metal, flammable, or foreign objects into the projector's vents or openings nor

leave them nearby. Doing so may result in fire, electric shock, or burns.

• If you are using two or more projectors side-by-side (BrightLink 1485Fi), leave enough space between

the projectors to allow for proper ventilation.

• You may need to clean the air filter and vent. A clogged air filter or vent can block ventilation needed

to cool the projector. Do not use canned air, or the gases may leave a residue.

• Do not use or store the projector in locations where it will be subject to dust or dirt. Otherwise, the

quality of the projected image may decline, or the air filter may become clogged, resulting in a

malfunction or fire.

• Follow the maintenance schedule for this projector. If the interior of the projector has not been cleaned

for a long time, dust may build up, which could cause fire or electric shock. Replace your air filter

periodically and contact your dealer to clean the interior of the projector, as needed.

• Do not store the projector outdoors for an extended length of time.

383

• Except as specifically explained in this manual, do not attempt to service this product yourself. Refer

all servicing to qualified personnel. Opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous

voltages and other hazards.

• Never open any covers on the projector except as specifically explained in this manual. Never attempt

to disassemble or modify the projector (including consumables). Refer all repairs to qualified service

personnel. Electrical voltages inside the projector can cause serious injury.

• Unplug the projector from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the

following conditions: if it does not operate normally when you follow the operating instructions, or

exhibits a distinct change in performance; if smoke, strange odors, or strange noises come from the

projector; if the power cord or plug is damaged or frayed; if liquid or foreign objects get inside the

projector, or if it has been exposed to rain or water; if it has been dropped or the housing has been

damaged. Continuing to use the projector under these conditions may result in fire or electric shock.

• Do not touch the plug during an electrical storm. Otherwise, you may receive an electric shock.

• Unplug the projector when it will not be used for extended periods. The insulation may deteriorate,

which may result in fire.

• Do not use the projector where it may be exposed to rain, water, or excessive humidity.

• Do not use or store the projector where it may be exposed to smoke, steam, corrosive gases,

excessive dust, vibration, or shock. Doing so may result in malfunction, electric shock, and fire.

• Do not use or store the projector in places where smoke from oil or cigarettes may be present, as it

can adversely affect the quality of the projected images.

• Do not use the projector where flammable or explosive gases may be present. The inside of the

projector can get very hot during use and the gases may ignite, resulting in a fire.

• Do not use or store the projector or remote control in a hot location, such as near a heater, in direct

sunlight, or in a closed vehicle. Thermal deformation or technical malfunction may occur, which may

result in a fire.

• Check the specifications for the power cable. Using an inappropriate power cable could result in fire or

electric shock. The power cable supplied with the projector is intended to comply with power supply

requirements for the country of purchase. If you use the projector in the country where it was

purchased, only use the power cable that came with the projector.

• If you use the projector in a country other than where you purchased it, use the correct power cord for

that country.

• Do not stand on the projector or place heavy objects on it. You may fall over, resulting in injury and

damage to the projector.

• Do not use the projector outside of the required temperature range below:

384

32 to 104 °F (0 to 40 °C) at an altitude of 7500 feet (2286 m) or less, or 32 to 95 °F (0 to 35 °C) at an

altitude of 7500 to 10000 feet (2286 to 3048 m)

When using multiple projectors at the same time (BrightLink 1485Fi):

32 to 95 °F (0 to 35 °C) at an altitude of 7500 feet (2286 m) or less, or 32 to 86 °F (0 to 30 °C) at an

altitude of 7500 to 10000 feet (2286 m to 3048 m)

Doing so may cause an unstable display and could lead to projector damage. Do not use or store the

projector where it may be exposed to sudden changes in temperature.

• Do not use or store the projector in places where it might be subjected to high and low extremes of

temperature.

• Do not store the projector outside of the required temperature range of 14 to 140 °F (–10 to 60 °C) or

in direct sunlight for long periods of time. Doing so may cause damage to the case.

• Do not place anything that can become warped or damaged by heat near the exhaust vents. Do not

bring your hands or face close to the vents while projection is in progress. Do not bring your face close

to the projector while it is in use.

• Before you move the projector, make sure its power is turned off, the plug is disconnected from the

outlet, and all cables are disconnected. Fire or electric shock may result.

• Do not place the source of an open flame, such as a lit candle, on or near the projector.

• During projection, do not block the light from the projector with a book or other objects. If the light from

the projector is blocked, the area on which the light shines becomes hot which could cause it to melt,

burn, or start a fire. Also, the lens may get hot due to the reflected light which could cause the

projector to malfunction. To stop projection, use the A/V Mute function, or turn off the projector.

• Do not modify the power cord. Do not place heavy objects on top of the power cord or bend, twist, or

pull it excessively. Keep the power cord away from hot electrical appliances. Do not use the power

cord if it is damaged. Fire or electric shock may result. Contact your dealer if the cable becomes

damaged.

• Always lower the volume before turning off the projector. Turning on the projector with the volume too

high can damage your ears.

• When a still image is displayed for a long time, image retention may occur on the screen. Do not

display images in the exact same position for long periods.

• Always attach the lens cover to the lens when not using the projector to prevent the lens from

becoming dirty or damaged.

• Do not store the interactive pens or the batteries in a hot location, such as near a heater, in direct

sunlight, or in a closed vehicle. Thermal deformation or technical malfunction may occur, which may

result in a fire.

385

• Remove the batteries from the interactive pens if you will not be using the pens for a long time.

• Incorrect battery usage may cause leakage of battery fluid and battery rupture, which could result in

fire, injury, or corrosion. When replacing batteries, take the following precautions: insert batteries so

that the polarities are correct; do not use batteries of different types or mix old and new batteries; do

not use any batteries other than those specified; if batteries leak, wipe away battery fluid with a soft

cloth; if battery fluid gets on your hands, wash them immediately; replace the batteries as soon as they

run out; remove the batteries if you will not be using the projector for a long period of time; do not

expose batteries to heat or flame and do not put them in water; dispose of used batteries according to

local regulations; keep batteries out of the reach of children. Batteries are choking hazards and are

very dangerous if swallowed.

Restriction of Use

Parent topic: Notices

Restriction of Use

When this product is used for applications requiring high reliability/safety such as transportation devices

related to aviation, rail, marine, automotive; disaster prevention devices; various safety devices; or

functional/precision devices, you should use this product only after giving consideration to including fail-

safes and redundancies into your design to maintain safety and total system reliability.

Because this product was not intended for use in applications requiring extremely high reliability/safety

such as aerospace equipment, main communication equipment, nuclear power control equipment, or

medical equipment related to direct medical care, please make your own judgment on this product's

suitability after a full evaluation.

Parent topic: Important Safety Instructions

List of Safety Symbols (corresponding to IEC60950-1 A2)

The following table lists the meaning of the safety symbols labeled on the equipment.

No. Symbol Approved Standards Description

1 IEC60417

No.5007

"ON" (power)

To indicate connection to the mains.

386

No. Symbol Approved Standards Description

2 IEC60417

No.5008

"OFF" (power)

To indicate disconnection from the

mains.

3 IEC60417

No.5009

Stand-by

To identify the switch or switch position

by means of which part of the equipment

is switched on in order to bring it into the

stand-by condition.

4 ISO7000

No.0434B,

IEC3864-B3.1

Caution

To identify general caution when using

the product.

5 IEC60417

No.5041

Caution, hot surface

To indicate that the marked item can be

hot and should not be touched without

taking care.

6 IEC60417

No.6042

ISO3864-B3.6

Caution, risk of electric shock

To identify equipment that has risk of

electric shock.

7 IEC60417

No.5957

For indoor use only

To identify electrical equipment designed

primarily for indoor use.

8 IEC60417

No.5926

Polarity of DC power connector

To identify the positive and negative

connections (the polarity) on a piece of

equipment to which a DC power supply

may be connected.

387

No. Symbol Approved Standards Description

9 — Polarity of DC power connector

To identify the positive and negative

connections (the polarity) on a piece of

equipment to which a DC. power supply

may be connected.

10 IEC60417

No.5001B

Battery, general

On battery powered equipment. To

identify a device for instance a cover for

the battery compartment, or the

connector terminals.

11 IEC60417

No.5002

Positioning of cell

To identify the battery holder itself and to

identify the positioning of the cell(s)

inside the battery holder.

12 — Positioning of cell

To identify the battery holder itself and to

identify the positioning of the cell(s)

inside the battery holder.

13 IEC60417

No.5019

Protective earth

To identify any terminal which is intended

for connection to an external conductor

for protection against electric shock in

case of a fault, or the terminal of a

protective earth electrode.

14 IEC60417

No.5017

Earth

To identify an earth (ground) terminal in

cases where neither the symbol No.13 is

explicitly required.

15 IEC60417

No.5032

Alternating current

To indicate on the rating plate that the

equipment is suitable for alternating

current only; to identify relevant

terminals.

388

No. Symbol Approved Standards Description

16 IEC60417

No.5031

Direct current

To indicate on the rating plate that the

equipment is suitable for direct current

only; to identify relevant terminals.

17 IEC60417

No.5172

Class II equipment

To identify equipment meeting the safety

requirements specified for Class II

equipment according to IEC 61140.

18 ISO 3864 General prohibition

To identify actions or operations that are

prohibited.

19 ISO 3864 Contact prohibition

To indicate injury that could occur due to

touching a specific part of the equipment.

20 — Never look into the optical lens while the

projector is on.

21 — To indicate that the marked item don’t

place anything on projector.

22 ISO3864

IEC60825-1

Caution, laser radiation

To indicate the equipment has a laser

radiation part.

23 ISO 3864 Disassembly prohibition

To indicate a risk of injury, such as

electric shock, if the equipment is

disassembled.

389

No. Symbol Approved Standards Description

24 IEC60417

No. 5266

Standby, partial standby

To indicate that part of the equipment is

in the ready status.

25 ISO3864

IEC60417

No. 5057

Caution, movable parts

To indicate that you must keep away

from movable parts according to

protection standards.

27 IEC 60417-6056 Caution (movable fan blades)

To indicate that you must keep away

from the blades of the movable fan

according to protection standards.

28 IEC 60417-6043 Caution (sharp corners)

To indicate that you must not touch the

sharp corners of the product according to

protection standards.

29 — Never look into the projection lens while

the projector is on.

30 ISO7010

No. W027

Warning, light emission (UV, visible light,

IR and so on)

To indicate that you must be careful not

to injure your eyes or skin when near light

emitting sections.

31 IEC60417

No. 5109

Not to be used in residential areas

To indicate that the electrical

equipment/device is not suitable for use

in residential area.

Parent topic: Notices

390

FCC Compliance Statement

For United States Users

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant

to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful

interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio

frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful

interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in

a particular installation. If this equipment does cause interference to radio and television reception, which

can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the

interference by one or more of the following measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

WARNING

The connection of a non-shielded equipment interface cable to this equipment will invalidate the FCC

Certification or Declaration of this device and may cause interference levels which exceed the limits

established by the FCC for this equipment. It is the responsibility of the user to obtain and use a shielded

equipment interface cable with this device. If this equipment has more than one interface connector, do

not leave cables connected to unused interfaces. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by

the manufacturer could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

For Canadian Users

CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B)

Parent topic: Notices

391

Binding Arbitration and Class Waiver

1. DISPUTES, BINDING INDIVIDUAL ARBITRATION, AND WAIVER OF CLASS ACTIONS AND

CLASS ARBITRATIONS

1.1 Disputes. The terms of this Section 1 shall apply to all Disputes between you and Epson. The term

"Dispute" is meant to have the broadest meaning permissible under law and includes any dispute, claim,

controversy or action between you and Epson arising out of or relating to this Agreement, Epson

branded products (hardware and including any related software), or other transaction involving you and

Epson, whether in contract, warranty, misrepresentation, fraud, tort, intentional tort, statute, regulation,

ordinance, or any other legal or equitable basis. "DISPUTE" DOES NOT INCLUDE IP CLAIMS, or more

specifically, a claim or cause of action for (a) trademark infringement or dilution, (b) patent infringement,

also agree, notwithstanding Section 1.6,that a court, not an arbitrator, may decide if a claim or cause of

action is for an IP Claim.

1.2 Binding Arbitration. You and Epson agree that all Disputes shall be resolved by binding arbitration

according to this Agreement. ARBITRATION MEANS THAT YOU WAIVE YOUR RIGHT TO A JUDGE

OR JURY IN A COURT PROCEEDING AND YOUR GROUNDS FOR APPEAL ARE LIMITED.

Pursuant to this Agreement, binding arbitration shall be administered by JAMS, a nationally recognized

arbitration authority, pursuant to its code of procedures then in effect for consumer related disputes, but

excluding any rules that permit joinder or class actions in arbitration (for more detail on procedure, see

Section 1.6 below). You and Epson understand and agree that (a) the Federal Arbitration Act (9 U.S.C.

§1, et seq.) governs the interpretation and enforcement of this Section 1, (b) this Agreement

memorializes a transaction in interstate commerce, and (c) this Section 1 shall survive termination of this

Agreement.

1.3 Pre-Arbitration Steps and Notice. Before submitting a claim for arbitration, you and Epson agree to

try, for sixty (60) days, to resolve any Dispute informally. If Epson and you do not reach an agreement to

resolve the Dispute within the sixty (60) days), you or Epson may commence an arbitration. Notice to

Epson must be addressed to: Epson America, Inc., ATTN: Legal Department, 3131 Katella Ave., Los

Alamitos, CA 90720 (the "Epson Address"). The Dispute Notice to you will be sent to the most recent

address Epson has in its records for you. For this reason, it is important to notify us if your address

changes by emailing us at EAILegal@ea.epson.com or writing us at the Epson Address above. Notice of

the Dispute shall include the sender's name, address and contact information, the facts giving rise to the

Dispute, and the relief requested (the "Dispute Notice"). Following receipt of the Dispute Notice, Epson

and you agree to act in good faith to resolve the Dispute before commencing arbitration.

1.4 Small Claims Court. Notwithstanding the foregoing, you may bring an individual action in the small

claims court of your state or municipality if the action is within that court's jurisdiction and is pending only

in that court.

392

1.5 WAIVER OF CLASS ACTIONS AND CLASS ARBITRATIONS. YOU AND EPSON AGREE THAT

EACH PARTY MAY BRING DISPUTES AGAINST THE OTHER PARTY ONLY IN AN INDIVIDUAL

CAPACITY, AND NOT AS A PLAINTIFF OR CLASS MEMBER IN ANY CLASS OR

REPRESENTATIVE PROCEEDING, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION FEDERAL OR STATE

CLASS ACTIONS, OR CLASS ARBITRATIONS. CLASS ACTION LAWSUITS, CLASS-WIDE

ARBITRATIONS, PRIVATE ATTORNEY-GENERAL ACTIONS, AND ANY OTHER PROCEEDING

WHERE SOMEONE ACTS IN A REPRESENTATIVE CAPACITY ARE NOT ALLOWED.

ACCORDINGLY, UNDER THE ARBITRATION PROCEDURES OUTLINED IN THIS SECTION, AN

ARBITRATOR SHALL NOT COMBINE OR CONSOLIDATE MORE THAN ONE PARTY'S CLAIMS

WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF ALL AFFECTED PARTIES TO AN ARBITRATION

PROCEEDING.

1.6 Arbitration Procedure. If you or Epson commences arbitration, the arbitration shall be governed by

the rules of JAMS that are in effect when the arbitration is filed, excluding any rules that permit arbitration

on a class or representative basis (the "JAMS Rules"), available at http://www.jamsadr.com or by calling

1-800-352-5267, and under the rules set forth in this Agreement. All Disputes shall be resolved by a

single neutral arbitrator, and both parties shall have a reasonable opportunity to participate in the

selection of the arbitrator. The arbitrator is bound by the terms of this Agreement. The arbitrator, and not

any federal, state or local court or agency, shall have exclusive authority to resolve all disputes arising

out of or relating to the interpretation, applicability, enforceability or formation of this Agreement,

including any claim that all or any part of this Agreement is void or voidable. Notwithstanding this broad

delegation of authority to the arbitrator, a court may determine the limited question of whether a claim or

cause of action is for an IP Claim, which is excluded from the definition of "Disputes" in Section 1.1

above. The arbitrator shall be empowered to grant whatever relief would be available in a court under

law or in equity. The arbitrator may award you the same damages as a court could, and may award

declaratory or injunctive relief only in favor of the individual party seeking relief and only to the extent

necessary to provide relief warranted by that party's individual claim. In some instances, the costs of

arbitration can exceed the costs of litigation and the right to discovery may be more limited in arbitration

than in court. The arbitrator's award is binding and may be entered as a judgment in any court of

competent jurisdiction.

You may choose to engage in arbitration hearings by telephone. Arbitration hearings not conducted by

telephone shall take place in a location reasonably accessible from your primary residence, or in Orange

County, California, at your option.

a) Initiation of Arbitration Proceeding. If either you or Epson decides to arbitrate a Dispute, both parties

agree to the following procedure:

(i) Write a Demand for Arbitration. The demand must include a description of the Dispute and the amount

of damages sought to be recovered. You can find a copy of a Demand for Arbitration at

http://www.jamsadr.com ("Demand for Arbitration").

(ii) Send three copies of the Demand for Arbitration, plus the appropriate filing fee, to: JAMS, 500 North

State College Blvd., Suite 600 Orange, CA 92868, U.S.A.

393

(iii) Send one copy of the Demand for Arbitration to the other party (same address as the Dispute

Notice), or as otherwise agreed by the parties.

b) Hearing Format. During the arbitration, the amount of any settlement offer made shall not be disclosed

to the arbitrator until after the arbitrator determines the amount, if any, to which you or Epson is entitled.

The discovery or exchange of non-privileged information relevant to the Dispute may be allowed during

the arbitration.

c) Arbitration Fees. Epson shall pay, or (if applicable) reimburse you for, all JAMS filings and arbitrator

fees for any arbitration commenced (by you or Epson) pursuant to provisions of this Agreement.

d) Award in Your Favor. For Disputes in which you or Epson seeks $75,000 or less in damages exclusive

of attorney's fees and costs, if the arbitrator's decision results in an award to you in an amount greater

than Epson's last written offer, if any, to settle the Dispute, Epson will: (i) pay you $1,000 or the amount

of the award, whichever is greater; (ii) pay you twice the amount of your reasonable attorney's fees, if

any; and (iii) reimburse you for any expenses (including expert witness fees and costs) that your attorney

reasonably accrues for investigating, preparing, and pursuing the Dispute in arbitration. Except as

agreed upon by you and Epson in writing, the arbitrator shall determine the amount of fees, costs, and

expenses to be paid by Epson pursuant to this Section 1.6d).

e) Attorney's Fees. Epson will not seek its attorney's fees and expenses for any arbitration commenced

involving a Dispute under this Agreement. Your right to attorney's fees and expenses under Section

1.6d) above does not limit your rights to attorney's fees and expenses under applicable law;

notwithstanding the foregoing, the arbitrator may not award duplicative awards of attorney's fees and

expenses.

1.7 Opt-out. You may elect to opt-out (exclude yourself) from the final, binding, individual

arbitration procedure and waiver of class and representative proceedings specified in this

Agreement by sending a written letter to the Epson Address within thirty (30) days of your assent

to this Agreement (including without limitation the purchase, download, installation of the

Software or other applicable use of Epson Hardware, products and services) that specifies (i)

your name, (ii) your mailing address, and (iii) your request to be excluded from the final, binding

individual arbitration procedure and waiver of class and representative proceedings specified in

this Section 1. In the event that you opt-out consistent with the procedure set forth above, all

other terms shall continue to apply, including the requirement to provide notice prior to litigation.

1.8 Amendments to Section 1. Notwithstanding any provision in this Agreement to the contrary, you

and Epson agree that if Epson makes any future amendments to the dispute resolution procedure and

class action waiver provisions (other than a change to Epson's address) in this Agreement, Epson will

obtain your affirmative assent to the applicable amendment. If you do not affirmatively assent to the

applicable amendment, you are agreeing that you will arbitrate any Dispute between the parties in

accordance with the language of this Section 1 (or resolve disputes as provided for in Section 1.7, if you

timely elected to opt-out when you first assented to this Agreement).

394

1.9 Severability. If any provision in this Section 1 is found to be unenforceable, that provision shall be

severed with the remainder of this Agreement remaining in full force and effect. The foregoing shall not

apply to the prohibition against class or representative actions as provided in Section 1.5. This

means that if Section 1.5 is found to be unenforceable, the entire Section 1 (but only Section 1)

shall be null and void.

Parent topic: Notices

Trademarks

EPSON®and Quick Corner®are registered trademarks, Epson iProjection is a trademark, and EPSON

Exceed Your Vision is a registered logomark of Seiko Epson Corporation.

PrivateLine®is a registered trademarks; SizeWiseTM is a trademark; and Extra CareSM is a service mark of

Epson America, Inc.

Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

Mac, macOS, and OS X are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

Google®is a registered trademark and AndroidTM , Google ChromeTM , and Google PlayTM are trademarks

of Google LLC.

HDBaseTTM and the HDBaseT Alliance logo are trademarks of the HDBaseT Alliance.

Miracast®is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance®.

General Notice: Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be

trademarks of their respective owners. Epson disclaims any and all rights in those marks.

Parent topic: Notices

transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise,

without the prior written permission of Seiko Epson Corporation. The information contained herein is

designed only for use with this Epson product. Epson is not responsible for any use of this information as

applied to other products.

395

Neither Seiko Epson Corporation nor its affiliates shall be liable to the purchaser of this product or third

parties for damages, losses, costs, or expenses incurred by purchaser or third parties as a result of:

accident, misuse, or abuse of this product or unauthorized modifications, repairs, or alterations to this

product, or (excluding the U.S.) failure to strictly comply with Seiko Epson Corporation's operating and

maintenance instructions.

Seiko Epson Corporation shall not be liable for any damages or problems arising from the use of any

options or any consumable products other than those designated as Original Epson Products or Epson

Approved Products by Seiko Epson Corporation.

This information is subject to change without notice.

A Note Concerning Responsible Use of Copyrighted Materials

Parent topic: Notices

A Note Concerning Responsible Use of Copyrighted Materials

Epson encourages each user to be responsible and respectful of the copyright laws when using any

Epson product. While some countries' laws permit limited copying or reuse of copyrighted material in

certain circumstances, those circumstances may not be as broad as some people assume. Contact your

legal advisor for any questions regarding copyright law.

Parent topic: Copyright Notice

10/21

CPD-57752R2

Table of Contents

Epson 1480Fi User Manual

Related Manuals